sap netweaver ’04 database administration guide · pdf filesap netweaver ’04...

230
SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ® on IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows Document Version 1.02 – July 10, 2006

Upload: truongtu

Post on 12-Mar-2018

270 views

Category:

Documents


8 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

SAP NetWeaver ’04

Database Administration Guide

SAP® on IBM DB2

Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

Document Version 1.02 – July 10, 2006

Page 2: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

© Copyright 2004 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. Microsoft, Windows, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, S/390, AS/400, OS/390, OS/400, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli, and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group. Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape. MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB, Sweden.

SAP, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, xApps, xApp, SAP NetWeaver, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary. These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. SAP Library document classification: PUBLIC Disclaimer Some components of this product are based on Java™. Any code change in these components may cause unpredictable and severe malfunctions and is therefore expressively prohibited, as is any decompilation of these components. Any Java™ Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used by SAP’s Support Services and may not be modified or altered in any way. Documentation in the SAP Service Marketplace You can find this documentation at the following Internet address: service.sap.com/instguides

SAP AG Neurottstraße 16 69190 Walldorf Germany T +49/18 05/34 34 24 F +49/18 05/34 34 20 www.sap.com

Page 3: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

Terms for Included Open Source Software This SAP software contains also the third party open source software products listed below. Please note that for these third party products the following special terms and conditions shall apply.

SAP License Agreement for STLport SAP License Agreement for STLport

between

SAP Aktiengesellschaft Systems, Applications, Products in Data Processing

Neurottstrasse 16 69190 Walldorf

Germany ( hereinafter: SAP )

and

you

( hereinafter: Customer ) 1. Subject Matter of the Agreement

a. SAP grants Customer a non-exclusive, non-transferable, royalty-free license to use the STLport.org C++ library (STLport) and its documentation without fee.

b. By downloading, using, or copying STLport or any portion thereof Customer agrees to abide by the intellectual property laws, and to all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

c. The Customer may distribute binaries compiled with STLport (whether original or modified) without any royalties or restrictions.

d. Customer shall maintain the following copyright and permission notices on STLport sources and its documentation unchanged: Copyright 2001 SAP AG

e. The Customer may distribute original or modified STLport sources, provided that: • The conditions indicated in the above permission notice

are met; • The following copyright notices are retained when

present, and conditions provided in accompanying permission notices are met:

Copyright 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company Copyright 1996,97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology. Copyright 1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev Copyright 2001 SAP AG Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Moscow Center for SPARC

Page 4: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

Technology makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. Boris Fomitchev makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. This material is provided "as is", with absolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Any use is at your own risk. Permission to use or copy this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided the above notices are retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code and to distribute modified code is granted, provided the above notices are retained, and a notice that the code was modified is included with the above copyright notice. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. SAP makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided with a limited warranty and liability as set forth in the License Agreement distributed with this copy. SAP offers this liability and warranty obligations only towards its customers and only referring to its modifications.

2. Support and Maintenance

SAP does not provide software maintenance for the STLport. Software maintenance of the STLport therefore shall be not included. All other services shall be charged according to the rates for services quoted in the SAP List of Prices and Conditions and shall be subject to a separate contract.

3. Exclusion of warranty As the STLport is transferred to the Customer on a loan basis and free of charge, SAP cannot guarantee that the STLport is error-free, without material defects or suitable for a specific application under third-party rights. Technical data, sales brochures, advertising text and quality descriptions produced by SAP do not indicate any assurance of particular attributes.

4. Limited Liability a. Irrespective of the legal reasons, SAP shall only be liable for

damage, including unauthorized operation, if this (i) can be compensated under the Product Liability Act or (ii) if caused due to gross negligence or intent by SAP or (iii) if based on the failure of a guaranteed attribute.

b. If SAP is liable for gross negligence or intent caused by employees who are neither agents or managerial employees of SAP, the total liability for such damage and a maximum limit on the scope of any such damage shall depend on the extent to which its occurrence ought to have anticipated by SAP when concluding the contract, due to the circumstances known to it at that point in time representing a typical transfer of the software.

c. In the case of Art. 4.2 above, SAP shall not be liable for indirect damage, consequential damage caused by a defect or lost profit.

d. SAP and the Customer agree that the typical foreseeable extent of damage shall under no circumstances exceed EUR 5,000.

e. The Customer shall take adequate measures for the protection of data and programs, in particular by making backup copies at the minimum intervals recommended by SAP. SAP shall not be liable for the loss of data and its recovery, notwithstanding the other limitations of the present Art. 4 if this loss could have been avoided by observing this obligation.

f. The exclusion or the limitation of claims in accordance with the present Art. 4 includes claims against employees or agents of SAP.

Page 5: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

Typographic Conventions

Type Style Description

Example Text Words or characters quoted from the screen. These include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons labels, menu names, menu paths, and menu options.

Cross-references to other documentation

Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text, graphic titles, and table titles

EXAMPLE TEXT Technical names of system objects. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table names, and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text, for example, SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text Output on the screen. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, names of variables and parameters, source text, and names of installation, upgrade and database tools.

Example text Exact user entry. These are words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation.

<Example text>

Variable user entry. Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system.

EXAMPLE TEXT Keys on the keyboard, for example, F2 or ENTER.

Icons

Icon Meaning

Caution

Example

Note

Recommendation

Syntax

Additional icons are used in SAP Library documentation to help you identify different types of information at a glance. For more information, see Help on Help → General Information Classes and Information Classes for Business Information Warehouse on the first page of any version of SAP Library.

Page 6: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

6 July 2006

Contents SAP Database Administration Guide: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows...................................................10

1 Introduction .......................................................................................10 1.1 About this Documentation .................................................................. 10

1.1.1 Who Should Use this Documentation.........................................................................10 1.1.2 How this Documentation is Structured........................................................................11

1.2 Naming Conventions ........................................................................... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP DB2 Admin Tools.......................................... 13 1.4 Admin Tools: Enhancements and Changes....................................... 13

1.4.1 New Features..............................................................................................................16 1.4.2 Differences Between 4.6D and 6.NN Admin Tools.....................................................19

1.5 DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 7: Enhancements ........... 20 1.6 DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 8: Enhancements ........... 22 1.7 DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 8: Enhancements ........... 24 1.8 DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 8.2.2: Enhancements ..... 25

2 Basic Concepts .................................................................................26 2.1 Introduction .......................................................................................... 26

2.1.1 The SAP DB2 Admin Tools ........................................................................................26 2.1.2 User Interfaces............................................................................................................27

2.2 SAP Log File Management .................................................................. 28 2.2.1 Recovery - The Need for Log Files.............................................................................28 2.2.2 Recovering Log Files ..................................................................................................30 2.2.3 Log File Life Cycle (Archive and Restore) ..................................................................31 2.2.4 Log File Deletion.........................................................................................................34 2.2.5 Protocols .....................................................................................................................36 2.2.6 Raw Device Log Files .................................................................................................36 2.2.7 Log File States ............................................................................................................37 2.2.8 Special Cases - Non-Standard Behavior of Database Systems ................................38

2.3 SAP Security Concept ......................................................................... 39 2.4 Multi-Partitioned Systems ................................................................... 40

3 Installation and Setup.......................................................................41 3.1 Introduction .......................................................................................... 41 3.2 SAP System Environment ................................................................... 43

3.2.1 SAP System Users and Groups .................................................................................43 3.2.2 User Environment .......................................................................................................45 3.2.3 Access Authorizations for Admin Tool-Related Directories........................................46

3.3 Installing the Admin Tools Manually .................................................. 47 3.3.1 Prerequisites for the Admin Tools Installation ............................................................48 3.3.2 General Information ....................................................................................................50 3.3.3 Upgrading the Admin Tools ........................................................................................50 3.3.4 Installing the Latest Admin Tools................................................................................51 3.3.5 Checking the Admin Tools Environment ....................................................................52 3.3.6 Actions Performed by the sddb6ins Program .............................................................53

Page 7: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 7

3.3.7 Special Configurations................................................................................................57 3.3.8 Enabling the Database for Rollforward Recovery.......................................................57

3.3.8.1 Enabling Rollforward Recovery for a Single-Partitioned Database ......................58 3.3.8.2 Enabling Rollforward Recovery for a Multi-Partitioned Database.........................59

3.3.9 Deinstalling the Admin Tools ......................................................................................60 3.4 Installation and Setup of the DB2 Control Center Extensions ......... 60

3.4.1 Installation of the DB2 Control Center ........................................................................61 3.4.2 Installing the DB2 Control Center Extensions ............................................................61 3.4.3 Setting Up the DB2 Control Center.............................................................................62 3.4.4 Using the DB2 Control Center Extensions .................................................................69

4 Configuration.....................................................................................70 4.1 Changing the Admin Tools Configuration ......................................... 70

4.1.1 Parameters Affecting Log File Management Storage.................................................70 4.1.2 Configuring the Admin Tools Using Environment Files ..............................................73

4.2 Configuring the System for Archiving Log Files ............................... 78 4.2.1 Archiving Directly to TSM ...........................................................................................80 4.2.2 Archiving Directly to Disk ............................................................................................81 4.2.3 Archiving to an Alternative Storage Management Product.........................................82 4.2.4 Indirect Archiving to Tape ...........................................................................................82 4.2.5 Indirect Archiving to TSM............................................................................................88 4.2.6 Indirect Archiving Using a Customer Script ................................................................89

4.3 Configuring TSM (Tivoli Storage Management)................................. 90 4.3.1 Configuring TSM Files dsm.opt and dsm.sys .............................................................91 4.3.2 Configuring TSM Environment Variables....................................................................92 4.3.3 Configuration Considerations .....................................................................................94

4.4 DB2 Configuration Parameters ........................................................... 95 4.5 Disk Space Considerations for Running the Admin Tools............... 96

5 Regular Administration ....................................................................98 5.1 DB2 Log File Management .................................................................. 98

5.1.1 Archiving Log Files from Disk to Backend ..................................................................98 5.1.2 Deleting Log Files .....................................................................................................101

5.2 Storage Management ......................................................................... 103 5.2.1 Checking the Space Available in a File System .......................................................104 5.2.2 Checking the Space Available in a Tablespace .......................................................104 5.2.3 Checking the Size of Tables and Indexes ................................................................106

5.3 Performance Monitoring.................................................................... 107 5.3.1 Monitoring Database Performance...........................................................................107 5.3.2 Monitoring Dynamic SQL Statements.......................................................................109 5.3.3 Updating Statistics for Database Tables and Checking for Reorganization.............109 5.3.4 Job Monitoring ..........................................................................................................110

5.4 Database Backup ............................................................................... 110 5.4.1 Backup Considerations.............................................................................................111 5.4.2 Performing the Backup .............................................................................................111 5.4.3 Integrity of Backups ..................................................................................................113 5.4.4 Frequency of Backups and Time Required ..............................................................113 5.4.5 Advanced Backup Techniques .................................................................................114

6 Advanced Tasks..............................................................................115 6.1 The db6util Tool.................................................................................. 115 6.2 Setting and Updating Passwords ..................................................... 116 6.3 Using the Journal in the DB2 Control Center Extensions .............. 116

Page 8: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

8 July 2006

6.4 Advanced Log File Management Tasks ........................................... 117 6.4.1 Deleting Special Log Files ........................................................................................118 6.4.2 Deleting Tapes from the Admin DB ..........................................................................120

6.5 Reorganization of Tables and Tablespaces..................................... 120 6.6 Redirected Restore ............................................................................ 122

6.6.1 Usage of Tool brdb6brt .............................................................................................123 6.7 Command Line Tasks Using db6clp................................................. 128 6.8 Monitoring Database Alerts............................................................... 130 6.9 Monitoring Lock Waits and Deadlocks............................................. 130 6.10 Managing Backups and Logs Archived on TSM............................ 131 6.11 The db2inidb Tool ............................................................................ 132

6.11.1 db2inidb Option: as mirror ......................................................................................133 6.11.2 db2inidb Option: as snapshot .................................................................................136 6.11.3 db2inidb Option: as standby for Backups ...............................................................138 6.11.4 db2inidb Option: as standby for Hot-Standby Database ........................................139

6.12 Dual Logging .................................................................................... 145 6.13 Adjusting the Content of the Admin DB......................................... 145

7 Emergency Tasks............................................................................147 7.1 SAP Database Recovery.................................................................... 147 7.2 Log File Restore of the SAP Database ............................................. 148 7.3 Recovery of the Admin DB ................................................................ 153

7.3.1 General Information ..................................................................................................153 7.3.2 Recovery Process.....................................................................................................154

Appendix A: Tool Command Line Parameters................................157 brarchive - Log File Archive Tool............................................................ 157 brdb6brt - Redirected Restore Tool ........................................................ 160 brrestore - Log File Retrieval Tool .......................................................... 164 db2uext2 - DB2 User Exit......................................................................... 167 db6adutl - SAP TSM Management Tool.................................................. 168 db6util - Tool to Assist Database Administration.................................. 169 dmdb6bkp - Database Backup Tool........................................................ 170 dmdb6srp - Update Statistics Tool ......................................................... 172 dmdb6rts - Table Reorganization Tool ................................................... 173 sddb6ins - Admin Tools Installation Program ....................................... 174 sddb6mir - Admin DB Creation and Mirror Tool Utility ......................... 176

Appendix B: Troubleshooting...........................................................177 DB2 Traces ............................................................................................... 177

DB2 Trace Facility db2trc...................................................................................................177 DB2 CLI Trace ...................................................................................................................178

Admin Tools Traces ................................................................................. 179 Downloading Admin Tool Patches from SAP Service Marketplace ..................................180

Troubleshooting Admin Tools and Programs ....................................... 182 General Troubleshooting Comments.................................................................................182 Initial Troubleshooting Steps..............................................................................................183 Installation (sddb6ins) Troubleshooting .............................................................................183 User Exit Troubleshooting..................................................................................................184

Page 9: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 9

brarchive/brrestore Troubleshooting..................................................................................189 DB2 Control Center Extensions Troubleshooting..............................................................204 Collecting Diagnostic Information for SAP Support ...........................................................205

Appendix C: Implementation Details................................................206 Admin DB Structure ................................................................................. 206

brarchive and brrestore backend Library Architecture.......................................................210 DB2 Control Center Extensions Architecture........................................ 211

Appendix D: Example of File init<DBSID>.db6 ...............................212 File init<DBSID>.db6 on UNIX ................................................................. 212 File init<DBSID>.db6 on Windows.......................................................... 215

Appendix E: Example of Customer Script db6sctsm.smp.............221 Appendix F: References ....................................................................223

DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows V7 - Additional Documentation ....... 223 DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows V8 - Additional Documentation ....... 225

Glossary and Index ............................................................................227

Page 10: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

10 July 2006

1 Introduction

1.1 About this Documentation This documentation supplies information specific to the SAP environment and describes daily administration tasks using both product tools and the SAP-specific administration tools. The documentation is written based on DB2 UDB Version 7 as the underlying database release. The concepts described in this documentation are also expected to apply to other DB2 for UNIX and Windows database versions.

The information in this documentation has been collected from a variety of sources such as previous administration documentations, SAP Notes and customer experience and gives the administrator a single point of reference. The information is presented in a task-oriented way, separating information frequently needed from that which the administrator only requires, for example, in an emergency. It also includes a new troubleshooting section giving advice about solving problems before contacting SAP, or what information to send to SAP if no solution can be found.

The information provided in this documentation applies to all SAP kernel releases starting from 3.1I and higher as well as IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows Version 7 and higher.

If you would like to give feedback on this documentation, use the following email address: [email protected]

1.1.1 Who Should Use this Documentation This documentation is intended primarily for database administrators and SAP system administrators who need to install and maintain an SAP system running on DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows. It is structured to be of use to both people new to database administration and experienced SAP administrators alike, including those with experience with other database products.

It will also be of use to a range of customer support functions when planning, installing, and maintaining systems, or assisting in these tasks.

Page 11: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 11

1.1.2 How this Documentation is Structured This documentation is divided into the following sections:

Chapters ...

1. Introduction

Provides general information about the guide, its targeted audience, interfaces, naming conventions and new features.

2. Basic Concepts

Describes administration and Admin Tools and the related concepts, including DB2 UDB-specific information about installing and configuring servers and clients for the SAP system.

3. Installation and Setup

Explains how to install Admin Tool patches and deal with upgrades. It also covers manual (re)installation of the tools if required.

4. Configuration

Describes the available options and steps required to configure the Admin Tools.

5. Regular Administration

Lists and describes tasks that system administrators need to perform on a regular basis such as storage administration, backup and log file management.

6. Advanced Tasks

Covers one-time or rarely needed tasks not related to configuration. Some tasks may be prerequisites for other day-to-day tasks, which must be performed before log files can be stored to tape.

Also includes monitoring and performance considerations.

7. Emergency Tasks

Tasks that administrators may need to perform after a database failure.

Appendices A. Tool Command Line Parameters

Contains detailed command line syntax for each command.

B. Troubleshooting

Describes what to do when tools do not work as expected.

C. Implementation Details

Contains internal tool information, especially for support personnel.

D. Example of the File init<DBSID>.db6

E. Example of Customer Script db6sctsm.smp

F. References

G Glossary and Index

Page 12: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

12 July 2006

1.2 Naming Conventions Terminology

For information about terminology used in this documentation, see Glossary and Index [Page 227].

Product Names In this documentation the following naming conventions apply:

SAP Web Application Server / SAP system

SAP Web Application Server is referred to as SAP Web AS or SAP system. Additionally the term SAP system also refers to other applications of mySAP.com.

IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows is referred to as DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows or DB2.

IBM DB2 Universal Database Enterprise Server Edition for UNIX and Windows

IBM DB2 Universal Database Enterprise Server Edition for UNIX and Windows is referred to as DB2 UDB ESE for UNIX and Windows

single-partitioned system / EE system

The term single-partitioned system replaces the term EE system.

multi-partitioned system / EEE system

The term multi-partitioned system replaces the term EEE system.

6.NN Admin Tools / 6.10 Admin Tools

The term 6.NN Admin Tools replaces the term 6.10 Admin Tools, as these Admin Tools can be used for any SAP system release starting from 6.10 and higher.

Tivoli Storage Management (TSM) / ADSM

The IBM storage product ADSM has been renamed to TSM (Tivoli Storage Manager) in the most recent versions. The names are often used interchangeably, but in this documentation the product is referred to as TSM. The term ADSM is normally only used in this guide to indicate program parameters or configuration parameter names.

Tivoli (IBM) no longer supports the product ADSM. Customers still using ADSM are strongly advised to upgrade to TSM Client Version 4.1 or higher.

Serious problems have occurred when using the Admin Tools with TSM Version 3.7. This version is also out of service now, so an upgrade is also strongly advised.

Windows

The term Windows refers to Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, or Windows 2000.

Servers can only be installed on Windows NT or Windows 2000. Clients can be installed on any Windows platform.

Page 13: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 13

1.3 End of Support of SAP DB2 Admin Tools With version 8.2, DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows has introduced its own log file management that replaces the SAP log file management tools (referred to as Admin Tools throughout this document). Therefore, the SAP log file management tools are no longer supported by:

• Version 9 and higher of IBM DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows

• SAP Java only systems

• SAP systems based on SAP kernel releases 7.00 or higher

• New operating system platforms, for example, Linux AMD64/EM64T, Linux on Power, Windows AMD64/EM64T or Solaris on AMD64.

• TheDB2 HADR feature.

If you are using DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows version 8.2 or higher, we recommend that you use DB2’s integrated log file management. The DB2 log file management is supported for all SAP releases. For more information, see the following documentation:

• IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows: New Log File Management that is available on SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/instuidesNW2004s → Operations → Database- Specific Guides

• DB2 documentation IBM DB2 Universal Database - Data Recovery and High Availability Guide and Reference

• SAP Note 913481

1.4 Admin Tools: Enhancements and Changes The following sections summarize recent changes to the Admin Tools.

Within these sections, we refer to the Admin Tools release and not the SAP system release, which do not need to be the same.

For example, the 4.6D Admin Tools should be used on all SAP 3.1I to 4.6D systems where DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 7 or higher is installed. The 6.10 Admin Tools or higher should be used with all SAP system releases above and including 6.10.

Page 14: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

14 July 2006

The following changes are informational or not patch-specific:

• Installation Program sddb6ins

The command line syntax of sddb6ins has been simplified by extracting information from the environment. The sddb6ins program now also contains the remaining Admin Tools, which it installs. sddb6ins therefore no longer requires a separate DBATOOLS.SAR file, and the shared library path environment variable must no longer be set before starting it.

The Admin Tools installation program sddb6ins now checks many aspects of the environment to locate the majority of problems experienced by customers. In the past a difficulty with the Admin Tools has been the runtime environment. Admin Tools files and directories may have been unintentionally removed or were given the wrong ownership or authorizations; environment variables may have been set to non-existent directories, and so on.

For more information, see Installing the Admin Tools Manually [Page 47].

• Admin Tools in an MCOD Environment

The Admin Tools have been modified to support this SAP feature. They are only installed with the first SAP system, that is, only once per database. As log files are shared by all the SAP systems using the same single database, user db2<dbsid> and all <sapsid>adm users can perform log file management tasks.

It is necessary to differentiate between the SAP system ID <SAPSID> and the SAP system database name <DBSID>, as these are no longer necessarily the same. Additionally, user IDs and directory names may be affected. If <SAPSID> and <DBSID> have the same value, as is often the case for the first SAP system installed on a database, the old terminology still applies as described in the table below.

However, there is a limitation in SAP 4.6x releases, that the initial SAP system must have the same ID as the SAP database. Further SAP systems have different IDs. The database connect user for the first SAP system in a 4.6D system environment is still sapr3.

If an MCOD system is removed, you must make sure that the db2<dbsid> user environment still points to another valid MCOD system using the same database.

The following terminology conversions must be used:

SAP System and Database Name Descriptions

ID Old ID New ID

SAP system ID <SID>, <sid>

<SAPSID>, <sapsid>

SAP database name

<SID>, <sid>

<DBSID>, <dbsid>

User ID Descriptions

User Old ID New ID

Database instance owner

db2<sid> db2<dbsid>

SAP database administrator

<sid>adm <sapsid>adm

Page 15: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 15

Database connect user

sapr3 sap<sapsid>

sapr3 is still used for the first SAP system in a 4.6D system environment.

Directory Names Descriptions

Directory Old Name New Name

SAP system related directories

<SID> <SAPSID>

db2<dbsid> home directory and subdirectories

<SID> <DBSID>

The following are examples of how the descriptions of directory names have changed on UNIX systems compared to earlier versions of this documentation on. If <SAPSID> and <DBSID> are the same, the real directory name after substitution remains unchanged:

Old New /usr/sap/<SID>/sys/exe/run /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/sys/exe/run

/db/<SID>/log_dir /db/<DBSID>/log_dir

If the original SAP system is removed, certain Admin Tools are no longer fully functional. This restriction only applies to 4.6D SAP systems.

From SAP system Release 6.10 and higher, it is only necessary to verify that the db2<dbsid> user is set up correctly. Use sddb6ins –checkonly to verify this. This user may require changes to his environment.

For more information about released platforms and availability, see SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/mcod.

• 64-bit Support

The Admin Tools have been modified to work with 64-bit platforms.

Some changes were specifically implemented for the 4.6D and 6.NN Admin Tools and delivered as patches. For more detailed information, see New Features [Page 16].

For information about the main differences between the 4.6D and 6.NN Admin Tools, see Differences Between 4.6D and 6.NN Admin Tools [Page 19].

Page 16: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

16 July 2006

1.4.1 New Features This section provides information about new features that have been specifically implemented for the 4.6D and 6.NN Admin Tools.

6.NN stands as a placeholder for all Admin Tools releases starting from 6.10 and higher.

New Features of 4.6D Patch 20 and 6.NN Patch 9 • brarchive/brrestore customer script interface

You can now write your own individual backend interface. For more information, see Archiving Log Files from Disk to Backend [Page 98].

• Option brarchive –GAL/-DMP

You use this option to adjust the Admin DB to a file system. For more information, see Adjusting the Content of the Admin DB [Page 145].

• Option sddb6ins –r

You use this option to recreate the Admin DB from a SAR file. For more information, see Recovery of the Admin DB [Page 153].

• Support of two TSM management classes

The User Exit and brarchive can now archive log files to two TSM management classes. For more information, see Archiving Directly to TSM [Page 80].

• Restore of log files excluding the Admin DB

The User Exit restores log files from log_archive or log_retrieve without any information about those log files in the Admin DB. You activate this feature by setting configuration variable DB2DB6_UEXIT_RETRIEVE_WO_DB in file init<DBSID>.db6.

• Admin Tools and DB2 Version 8

The Admin Tools are now supported for DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 8.

For more detailed information about 4.6D patch 22 and 6.NN patch 11, see SAP Note 533979.

New Features of 4.6D Patch 22 and 6.NN Patch 11 • Option brarchive –dt

You use this option to delete tapes using the command line. For more information, see Deleting Log Files [Page 101].

• Option brarchive –do

You use this option to delete obsolete log files using the command line. For more information, see Advanced Log File Management Tasks [Page 117].

Page 17: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 17

• Support of TSM LANFREE

The Admin Tools have been modified to support the TSM LANFREE feature. You activate this feature by setting configuration variable DB2DB6_TSM_MULTITHREADED in file init<DBSID>.db6. For more information, see Configuring TSM (Tivoli Storage Management) [Page 90].

For more detailed information about 4.6D patch 22 and 6.NN patch 11, see SAP Note 597356.

New Features of 4.6D Patch 23 and 6.NN Patch 12 • Indirect archiving without accessing the Admin DB

If you are using indirect archiving, the User Exit is now able to archive without accessing the Admin DB. The necessary tasks to update the Admin DB content are moved from the User Exit to brarchive. You activate or deactivate this feature of the User Exit by setting configuration variable DB2DB6_UEXIT_ARCHIVE_WO_DB to ON or OFF.

Program sddb6ins automatically sets variable DB2DB6_UEXIT_ARCHIVE_WO_DB to ON if during the installation of the Admin Tools the new version of transaction DB12 is recognized by the Admin Tools.

• Archiving directly to disk

If you are using direct archiving, the User Exit is now able to archive log files directly to disk. For more information, see Configuring the System for Archiving Log Files [Page 78].

For more detailed information about 4.6D patch 23 and 6.NN patch 12, see SAP Note 597416.

New Features of 4.6D Patch 25 and 6.NN Patch 14 • Indirect archiving without accessing the Admin DB is now the default for all

releases.

Before mirroring, the sddb6mir tool also adds missing log files. This updates the information in the old version of transaction DB12. Archiving without the Admin DB causes fewer problems. For this reason, this is now the default for all SAP system releases. To turn archiving without the Admin DB off, set DB2DB6_UEXIT_ARCHIVE_WO_DB to OFF in the init file.

New Features of 4.6D Patch 27 and 6.NN Patch 16 • For 4.6D patch 27 and 6.NN patch 16, you must use TSM Version 4 or higher.

• TSM is now supported for Linux IA64 and Windows IA64.

HP-UX IA64 is not yet supported since the TSM API and client is not yet available.

• To deinstall the Admin Tools, you can use sddb6ins –d.

Page 18: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

18 July 2006

New Features of Other Administrative Tools • Backup restore tool brdb6brt patch 12

If an incremental or delta backup was detected, option INCREMENTAL AUTOMATIC was added.

• Backup restore tool brdb6brt patch 11

AutoStorage support was added.

• Backup restore tool brdb6brt patch 9

Option –nn ALL was added. With this option, you can create backups or the redirected restore script for all database partitions with one call.

• Backup restore tool brdb6brt patch 5

New comments starting with SET IGNORE ROLLFORWARD

The script created by brdb6brt patch 2 or higher contains new comments starting with SET IGNORE ROLLFORWARD. You might have to use this feature if the log files contain information about container change operations and the operations cannot be applied during the roll-forward recovery. This may occur in a redirected restore scenario because the container layout is then different to the one when the backup was made.

You activate this feature by removing the two dashes (−−) at the beginning of the corresponding comment line.

Support of striped containers

Striped containers are created if you are using DB2 Version 7 and instance registry variable DB2_STRIPED_CONTAINERS is set to ON. For DB2 Version 8, this variable is set to ON by default.

Backup information in brdb6brt

brdb6brt automatically contains the information from the latest full backup. It retrieves the information from the backup history file.

Option –bm RETRIEVE RELOCATE

You use this option to create scripts that can be used for database relocation. These scripts can be used as a template in db2relocatedb with command relocate DB or in db2inidb with command RELOCATE USING.

Option –replace <replace definition>

You use this option to modify the generated scripts for redirected restore and relocation. For example, you can replace the database name <DBSID>.

For more detailed information about the current patch of brdb6brt, see SAP Note 867914

Page 19: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 19

• DB2 Control Center Extensions patch 4:

You can now use the DB2 Control Center Extensions for the 4.6D and 6.NN Admin Tools.

The DB2 Control Center Extensions have been modified to support the customer script option of brarchive.

The DB2 Control Center Extensions are supported for DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 8.

For more detailed information about patch 3 of the DB2 Control Center Extensions, see SAP Note 703988.

1.4.2 Differences Between 4.6D and 6.NN Admin Tools Since the implementation of the 6.NN Admin Tools, the main differences to the 4.6D Admin Tools are:

• ADM<DBSID> database mirroring no longer required

In the past, the Admin DB ADM<DBSID> was mirrored to the SAP database to reduce the risk of data loss. This has proven to be unnecessary. Thus, the program sdd6mir, which was used to perform this action, is no longer required. When SAP system log files are stored directly by the User Exit to TSM, the Admin DB is not required and so no backup (mirror) of this database is needed. If log files are stored using brarchive, a backup copy of the Admin DB is stored to the same medium as the log file(s) at the end of each brarchive run. For more information about how to recover the Admin DB, see Recovery of the Admin DB [Page 153].

This implies that the 6.NN Admin Tools delivery does not contain program sddb6mir any more.

• New location for Admin Tools executables

To reduce the dependencies between the almost release-independent Admin Tools and the release-dependent SAP products, the Admin Tools, their configuration, protocol and trace files have been moved. This means that, for example, unlike Admin Tool versions up to 4.6D, the 6.10 Admin Tools no longer need to be re-installed after an SAP system upgrade.

For more information, see Installing the Admin Tools Manually [Page 47].

Page 20: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

20 July 2006

The following table shows the location of the Admin Tools files and variables for 4.6D and 6.NN:

4.6D 6.NN

Executables and libraries:

brarchive/ brrestore, db6adutl, libdb6*

UNIX: /usr/sap/<SAPSID>SYS/ exe/run

Windows: <drive>:\usr\sp\<SAPSID>\SYS\exe\run

UNIX: <INSTHOME>/admintools/ bin

Windows: <INSTHOME>\admintools\ bin

Protocol files UNIX: /db2/<DBSID>/saparch /db2/<DBSID>/saprest

Windows: <drive>:\db2\db2<dbsid>\ saparch <drive>:\db2\db2<dbsid>\ saprest

UNIX: <INSTHOME>/admintools/ protocols

Windows: <INSTHOME>\admintools\ protocols

Trace files UNIX: /tmp/TraceFiles

Windows: <DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR>\ TraceFiles

UNIX: <INSTHOME>/admintools/ TraceFiles

Windows: <INSTHOME>\admintools\ TraceFiles

TSM environment variables

UNIX: in.dbenv_<host>.csh/sh

Windows: user environment

UNIX: <INSTHOME>/admintools/ bin/dbaenv_<host>.csh/ sh

Windows: user environment

1.5 DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 7: Enhancements The following are the major new features in Version 7.1 and Version 7.2, which are relevant to the Admin Tools:

Version 7.1 • Closing the Active Log File after Backup

After an online backup is complete, DB2 forces the currently active log file to be closed and as a result it will be archived. This ensures that an online backup has a complete set of archived log files available for recovery. For more information, see the IBM documentation DB2 Administration Guide: Implementation

Page 21: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 21

• On Demand Log Archive Support

You can now force the currently active log file closed, which is then automatically archived by DB2 if the User Exit is enabled. Database administrators are thus provided with more granular control over their backup and restore strategy. For more information, see the IBM documentation DB2 Administration Guide: Implementation.

• Log Limit Increased to 32 GB

The maximum size of (the sum of) all log files has been increased from 4 GB to 32 GB. This enables applications to perform extremely large amounts of work within a single transaction. For more information, see the IBM documentation DB2 Administration Guide: Implementation.

• Renaming a Tablespace

When creating a tablespace, you specify its name. In previous versions, you were not allowed to change that name again during the lifetime of the tablespace object. Now, an administrator can rename a tablespace with the RENAME TABLESPACE statement. For more information, see the IBM documentation DB2 Administration Guide: Implementation.

Version 7.2 • Block Transactions When Log Directory is Full

DB2 Version 7.2 provides a new registry variable DB2_BLOCK_ON_LOG_DISK_FULL, which is used to prevent disk full errors from being generated when DB2 cannot create a new log file in the active log directory. DB2 attempts to create the log file every five minutes and writes a message to file db2diag.log after each attempt. This file indicates if your application is hanging.

For more information about the DB2 instance variable DB2_BLOCK_ON_LOG_DISK_FULL, see the DB2 Release Notes.

• Suspended I/O

Supports continuous system availability, while allowing online split mirror handling of the database. By momentarily suspending I/O to disk, DB2 will ensure that the split mirror copy maintains its integrity. A new tool db2inidb has been created that operates on split mirror copies.

If you want to use the db2inidb tool, we strongly recommend that you read The db2inidb Tool [Page 132] before you start using it.

• Dual Logging

DB2 now has the capability to mirror the active log files to protect databases from accidental deletion of an active log and data corruption caused by a hardware failure. A new registry variable DB2_NEWLOGPATH2 instructs the database to write an identical copy of the log files to a different path on a physically separate disk.

Page 22: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

22 July 2006

• Parallel Recovery

DB2 now uses multiple agents to perform both crash recovery and database roll-forward recovery. This may improve performance on SMP machines.

• Incremental and Delta Backups

There are two backup types supported:

Incremental backup:

Only contains pages that have been modified since the last full database or tablespace backup.

Delta backup:

Only contains data that has changed since the last tablespace backup (full, incremental, or delta backup).

1.6 DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 8: Enhancements All new features of DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 8 are described in the IBM documentation IBM DB2 Universal Database Version 8 - What’s New.

This section briefly summarizes new features that affect log file management and database administration in an SAP environment.

Logging Enhancements • Dual Logging

Restrictions of this feature, which was introduced in DB2 Version 7.2, have been removed. This feature is now supported on Windows as well. You can choose the mirror log directory by setting database configuration parameter mirrorlogpath.

• Infinite Logging

It allows an active unit of work to span the primary logs and archive logs, effectively allowing a transaction to use an infinite number of log files. Without infinite active log enabled, the log records for a unit of work must fit in the primary log space. Infinite active log is enabled by setting logsecond to -1. Infinite active logging can be used to support environments with large jobs that require more log space than you would normally allocate to the primary logs.

Be aware that if you activate this feature, rollbacks may take a long time if the log files containing the rollback information need to be retrieved by the User Exit. We strongly recommend that you use this feature only if you are using direct archiving.

If you use indirect archiving, it is possible that the User Exit cannot retrieve required log files for a rollback, because they have already been archived and deleted from log_archive by brarchive. In addition, you should set the new database configuration parameters MAX_LOG and NUM_LOG_SPAN to avoid that transactions run indefinitely.

Page 23: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 23

• Block Transactions when Log Directory is Full

The block on log disk full function, which was introduced in DB2 Version 7, is now set using database configuration parameter blk_log_dsk_ful.

• Increased Log Space

The maximum amount of log space, which can be defined, has increased from 32 GB to 256 GB.

Backup and Recovery Enhancements • XBSA Support

Backup can now interface with solutions from storage vendors that have implemented the XBSA industry standard interface.

• Point in Time Rollforward Recovery to Local Time

When using point in time (PIT) rollforward recovery, you can now specify the time as local time. This makes it easier to roll forward to a specific point in time and eliminates potential errors due to the translation of local to GMT time.

• Database Maintenance Mode: QUIESCE

Using the new QUIESCE command, you can force all users off an instance or a database and put it into a quiesced mode for database maintenance activities. The quiesce mode of the database is ideal to create an offline backup without the need to stop the SAP application servers.

Availability Enhancements • Online Table Reorganization

Online table reorganization allows applications to access the table during the reorganization. In addition, online table reorganization can be paused and resumed later by anyone with the appropriate authorization by using the schema and table name. Online table reorganization is allowed only on tables with type-2 indexes and without extended indexes.

• Online Index Reorganization

A table and its existing indexes can be read and updated during an index reorganization using the new REORG INDEXES command.

• Online Configuration Parameters

Over 50 configuration parameters can now be set online. Changes to these online configuration parameters take immediate effect without the need to stop and start the instance, or deactivate and activate the database. You no longer have to disconnect users when you fine tune your system, which gives you more flexibility to decide when to change the configuration.

• DMS Container Operations

If you use database-managed tablespaces, DB2 Version 8 will allow you to drop a container from a tablespace, reduce the size of existing containers, and add new containers to a tablespace in a way that a rebalance does not occur.

Usability Enhancements DB2 Control Center and 64-bit Instances

The DB2 Control Center can now be used to administer 32-bit and 64-bit instances.

Page 24: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

24 July 2006

1.7 DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 8.2: Enhancements

• Integrated log file management

With Version 8.2, DB2 has introduced its own integrated log file management. For more information, see the document IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows: New Log File Management that is available on SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/instuidesNW2004s → Operations → Database-Specific Guides

• Automatic RUNSTATS:

With automatic statictics collection, you let DB2 determine, which statistics are required by your workload and which statistics need to be updated. With AutoRunstats enabled, DB2 will automatically run the RUNSTATS tool in the background to make sure that the correct statistics are collected and maintained.

AutoRunstats replaces the former internal mechanism of SAP CCMS and is now available for all SAP system releases. For more information, see SAP Note 860724 Configuration of CCMS Planning Calendar for AutoRunstats.

• Inclusion of transaction logs in backup images

When creating an online backup image, you can include the log files that are required to restore and recover a database in the backup image. The advantages are as follows:

You only need the backup image to ensure the consistency of an online backup.

You do not have to decide any more which log files are required.

This feature is supported by dmdb6bkp. For more information, see dmdb6bkp – Database Backup Tool [page 170].

• Self tuning backup and restore operations

DB2 automatically chooses the number of buffers, the buffer size, and the parallelism settings for both backup and restore operations.

• New command for simplified database recovery

The new command for database recovery combines the functions of the RESTORE DATABASE and ROLLFORWARD DATABASE commands. Using this command, you specify the point in time to which you want the database to be recovered. You do not need to indicate which database backup image must be restored or which log files are required to reach the specified point in time. You can also use this new command for multi-partitioned databases.

• Throttling database tools

Running DB2 database tools can have a significant impact on the database performance. Using this feature, you can decrease the priority of a specific database tool to a desired value.

This feature is supported by tool dmdb6bkp. For more information, see dmdb6bkp – Database Backup Tool [page 170].

Page 25: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 25

1.8 DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 8.2.2: Enhancements

• Automatic resizing of DMS tablespaces (AutoResize)

DMS tablespaces consist of file containers or raw device containers and their sizes are set when the containers are assigned to the tablespace. The tablespace is considered full when all of the space within the containers has been used. However, you can add or extend containers using the SQL statement ALTER TABLESPACE that allows more space to be given to the tablespace. DMS tablespaces also have a feature called “auto-resize”. As space is consumed in a DMS table space that can be automatically resized.

• Automatic storage management (AutoStorage)

Databases that are enabled for automatic storage have a set of one or more storage paths associated with them. DB2 uses one or more storage paths as location where it creates AutoStorage tablespace containers.

You can only enable DB2’s automatic storage management during database creation. You cannot disable automatic storage management afterwards.

Page 26: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

26 July 2006

2 Basic Concepts

2.1 Introduction This chapter describes the concepts relating to the Admin Tools, and the terminology used throughout this documentation. Much of this terminology is described in Glossary and Index [Page 227].

This documentation includes new and updated information that was not available in previous versions.

2.1.1 The SAP DB2 Admin Tools The SAP DB2 Admin Tools are a collection of tools specific to the SAP environment, which supplement standard DB2 tools. They can be divided into the following categories:

• Log file management tools

• Database backup and restore support tools

• Performance related tools

In addition to the tools themselves, a graphical interface, the DB2 Control Center Extensions, has been created that simplifies access to several of the Admin Tools. These are extra menu options and windows that are available in the DB2 Control Center after the extensions are installed.

Page 27: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 27

The following graphic shows the relationship between the Admin Tools and the DB2 Control Center Extensions plus the SAP system and database.

2.1.2 User Interfaces System administrators can perform the DBA tasks using the following interfaces:

• DB2 Command Line Processor (CLP)

DB2 tool used to execute database utilities, SQL statements and get online help. It offers a variety of command options, and can be started in interactive input mode, command mode and batch mode. For more information, see the DB2 Command Reference.

• DB2 Control Center (DB2CC)

DB2 tool offering a graphical user interface that simplifies administrative tasks such as configuring the database, backup and recovery, scheduling jobs, and managing media. To start the DB2 Control Center, use the db2cc command on the command line, or use Start panels on Windows platforms. The DB2 Control Center can be extended with the SAP Admin Tools Control Center extensions to support SAP-specific tasks related to log file management. You can also access tools such as DB2 Visual Explain and DB2 Performance Monitor from the DB2 Control Center. For introductory information, choose Help → Getting Started.

SAP database<DBSID>

SAP System<SAPSID>

SAP processes

DB2 Control Center+ SAP Extensions

Mon

itor

+ Ex

ecut

e

Monitor+ Execute

Admin databaseADM<DBSID>

Protocol+ Query

Execute

Admin Tools

Configure+ Query

Page 28: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

28 July 2006

• Operating System Command Line

This can be used to perform the majority of tasks described in this documentation. Generally this is the fastest and most flexible method, but may require user knowledge of complex command syntax. The system administrator can also use this interface to automate tasks, for example, by writing scripts or batch files.

• SAP Transactions

These provide an additional graphical interface for starting specific tasks. The number of available tasks is limited, but they are often neither platform nor database-specific and can therefore be used in a mixed environment.

2.2 SAP Log File Management This section explains why log file management is an essential part of system administration, and how the Admin Tools assist in this task. It covers the following topics:

• Recovery − The Need for Log Files [Page 28]

• Recovering Log Files [Page 30]

• Log File Life Cycle (Archive and Restore) [Page 31]

• Log File Deletion [Page 34]

• Protocols [Page 36]

• Raw Device Log Files [Page 36]

• Log File States [Page 37]

• Special Cases – Non-Standard Behavior of Database Systems [Page 38]

2.2.1 Recovery - The Need for Log Files Once a database is up and running, one of the most essential tasks for a database administrator is the management of database backups and log files to ensure that databases can be recovered after a serious failure. The DB2 Database Manager generates log files to keep track of changes made to the database. These log files are required for the following purposes:

• Explicit and implicit rollback

When a database transaction is rolled back all changes are undone.

Explicit rollback

An application indicates that changes that it started to make to the database are invalid.

Implicit rollback

A program making changes to the database does not commit changes before exiting, either through incorrect programming or a crash.

In both cases the database needs log file information to return the database to the state it was in before the changes were made.

Page 29: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 29

• Database recovery

The DB2 Database Manager may be forced to restart without applications being able to close all open transactions. The log files containing the information about changes made by these transactions are required to perform database recovery when the database manager is started again. This involves rolling back (undoing) all open transactions for all applications.

• Database restore

A database can be recreated by restoring a previous backup. A backup represents the state of a database at the time the backup was performed, but does not contain information about transactions completed after this time. Therefore, after a backup image is used to restore a database, log file data generated after the backup was taken must be added to the database again, to bring the database completely up-to-date. This process is known as rollforward recovery. The command to add the log file information is as follows: DB2 ROLLFORWARD.

Restoring from an offline backup image

Such a database is immediately usable after the ROLLFORWARD STOP subcommand. Alternatively, log files can be first applied to bring the database up to date (to end of logs).

Restoring from an online backup image

In the case of an online backup, the log files generated while the backup operation was running are also required, as transactions may have modified the database contents during the time of the backup. Without this additional data the restored database cannot be activated. The database must be rolled forward to at least the point in time when the backup operation completed to ensure that the data is consistent throughout the database.

Rollback and database recovery do not normally require user intervention. The DB2 Database Manager retains all log files as long as they contain information from open transactions. User intervention is only required if the directory where the database manager stores log files is damaged or lost. This directory is known both as the LOGPATH and log directory. In case of loss or damage, you can recover at least those files that have been successfully archived with the tools described below.

If the log directory is changed and then the subdirectory or any required log files in that subdirectory are removed, DB2 will look for log files in the default log directory (SQLOGDIR) when the database is activated. If the log files are not found, the database will enter a backup pending state.

In connection with rollforward operations, DB2 version 7 supports a log overflow directory. The rollforward operation first checks for logs in the location specified by the LOGPATH database configuration parameter. If you have moved any logs from the location specified by the log path parameter, use the ROLLFORWARD overflow directory parameter to specify the path to the logs that you moved. This is especially important in connection with recovery when logging to raw devices.

Page 30: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

30 July 2006

2.2.2 Recovering Log Files The tools db2uext2 (the User Exit), brarchive and brrestore were developed as the log file management component of the Admin Tools. Their main purposes are:

• To archive log files.

• To assist database administrators performing database rollforward operations after a database restore.

The Admin Tools are automatically installed as part of an SAP system installation with R3SETUP. If you install your SAP system with SAPinst, the Admin Tools are no longer automatically installed. You can manually (re)install, upgrade or patch the Admin Tools using the sddb6ins program. For more information, see Installing the Admin Tools Manually [Page 47].

Rollforward recovery is not enabled by default. Unless otherwise configured, the DB2 Database Manager reuses a fixed number of log files in a circular fashion, for example, 0,1,2,3,0,1,2,3,0 and so on. This behavior can be modified so that the database manager uses log files in an ascending order, for example, 0,1,2,3,4,…,9999999. By default, the database manager also does not start any application (User Exit) to independently archive full log files for later recovery.

Database administrators are strongly recommended to set the following database parameters in the SAP environment to ON:

• LOGRETAIN

Rollforward recovery is enabled by turning on this parameter. That is, circular logging is turned off and each new log file has a higher number.

Each time the LOGRETAIN parameter is turned off and on again, the database manager resets log file numbers and starts from zero again. This can result in several log files having the same log file number on a given node. The log files management tools only directly support recovery of the most recent version of log files. Recovery of older versions must be done manually.

• USEREXIT

The User Exit mechanism is enabled by turning on this parameter. The User Exit is automatically started by the DB2 engine each time a log file becomes full.

A backup is required after setting the LOGRETAIN parameter (or both), after which the database can be started again.

To perform online backups, the database must be operated in rollforward recovery mode. To restore the database from an online backup, all log files in use during the online backup operation must be available to complete the restore operation.

Once these parameters have been turned on and a backup has been performed, the Admin Tools can be used to archive log files. The User Exit (db2uext2) is then automatically started by the database each time a log file is filled. Depending on how it is configured, the User Exit either archives log files directly to a storage management product, or it copies the log files to the directory referred to as archive directory (as defined by the DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH environment variable). Groups of files in the archive directory can then be archived to tape, TSM or with an individual script using brarchive later.

Page 31: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 31

The database can be recovered later using the DB2 commands RESTORE and ROLLFORWARD. Dependent on the configuration, the User Exit either retrieves log files directly from the chosen repository, or from the archive directory and/or retrieve directories. The latter is the directory (defined by the DB2DB6_RETRIEVE_PATH environment variable) to which log files are restored using brrestore. To complete a rollforward operation (other than stop), brrestore and ROLLFORWARD operations may need to be performed repeatedly until all required log files have been retrieved and rolled into the database.

If the database is not rolled forward to the end of all logs when restarted, the Database Manager will create new log files starting with the number immediately following the last log file that was rolled into the database. This can result in several log files having the same log file number on a given node. The log file management tools only directly support recovery of the most recent version of log files. Recovery of older versions must be done manually.

Running the User Exit, brarchive and brrestore The User Exit does not need to be started by a user – it is automatically called by DB2 if configured correctly. Both brarchive and brrestore can be called from within the DB2 Control Center or can be started from the command line. brarchive can also be scheduled to be (regularly) started using the DBA Planning Calendar (SAP transaction DB13), or otherwise automated using scripts or batch files.

2.2.3 Log File Life Cycle (Archive and Restore) The following section covers the standard scenarios known as indirect and direct archiving. There is a third scenario, which is a variation of direct archiving, where the SAP User Exit is configured to call a vendor User Exit. The log file cycle is similar to direct archiving with the log files being copied elsewhere but the target and exact behavior depend on the vendor User Exit.

The graphic describes the possible life cycle of a log file when using the log file management tools.

Page 32: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

32 July 2006

IndirectS0000003.LOG

LOGPATH DB Parameter S0000004.LOG…/log_dir . User Exit offline retained

S0000005.LOG TSM, TAPE or SCRIPTS0000006.LOG S0000002.LOGS0000007.LOG archived retained

online active User Exit restored retainedonline retained S0000000.LOG

S0000001.LOG

DirectLOGPATH DB Parameter . TSM, DISK or VENDOR…/log_dir . S0000000.LOG

S0000005.LOG S0000001.LOGS0000006.LOG User Exit S0000002.LOGS0000007.LOG S0000003.LOG

online active S0000004.LOGonline retained archived retained

ArchiveRestore

…/log_retrieve/<DBSID>

brarchive

brrestore

DB2DB6_RETRIEVE_PATH

…/log_archive/<DBSID>

(A)(B)

(C)(D)

(D)

(A)

(D)

When the USEREXIT database configuration parameter is set, the database engine automatically starts the User Exit program to archive each log file as soon as it is full or it is closed. The location the file is moved to depends on the configuration of the User Exit. By default, log files are archived indirectly by first copying the file to the archive directory. The User Exit can be reconfigured to archive directly using TSM, archive to disk or via an alternative User Exit.

The Admin Tools can only administer the latest version of a log file with a given number per node, that is, you cannot administer two log files with the number 25 on node 0.

Indirect Archiving and Restore (Default) Single log files are copied into the archive directory by the User Exit (A). brarchive is then used to archive groups of offline log files into an archive repository (also known as backend repository) (B). File archiving using the archive directory is referred to as indirect archiving.

brrestore retrieves archived log files from the repository if they are no longer in the archive directory, and places them in the retrieve directory (C) where the User Exit can access them.

When requested by a ROLLFORWARD operation in connection with a database restore action, the User Exit retrieves log files from the archive or the retrieve directory (D).

Page 33: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 33

Only indirect archiving supports archiving to tape without a vendor storage management product. However, before you decide to use this solution you should take the following disadvantages into consideration:

• Log files are not immediately archived to long-term storage. Therefore, log files copied by the User Exit but not yet archived with brarchive can be lost if the disk containing the archive directory fails.

• The complexity of the solution, including additional storage directories and an extra Admin DB slightly increases the risk of failure.

Direct Archiving and Restore Direct archiving is the recommended method for log file archiving, as it is the simplest and therefore most reliable method. Log files are archived immediately and directly to long-term storage. However, either TSM or another storage management product with its own User Exit is required. You can use these products not only to archive log files but also to archive backups.

The User Exit can be configured to archive directly to TSM, archive to disk or to call a vendor User Exit for an alternative storage product. The latter provides support for any products which provide a User Exit, whilst ensuring that SAP tables containing log file information are also updated. A later ROLLFORWARD operation, after restoring the database, results in the files being automatically restored from the same source. Log files are not renamed during direct archiving or restore.

We recommend that database administrators use direct archiving as it performs well and requires minimal maintenance. ROLLFORWARD operations after a database restore normally require no user interaction when using direct archiving.

For more information about how to configure the User Exit and the Admin Tools in general, see Changing the Admin Tools Configuration [Page 70].

Log File Naming Convention The log file names in the graphic above are simplified for readability depending on the way they are archived:

• Direct archiving

Files are stored to the backend without their names being modified except if you are using direct archiving to disk. In this case, the node number NODEXXXX is appended to avoid problems in a multi-partitioned environment.

• Indirect archiving

When the User Exit copies log files from the log directory to the archive directory, the files are renamed by appending the file-closure timestamp (14 digits) and the node number (NODExxxx). In ROLLFORWARD mode, when the User Exit moves files from the archive or retrieve directory back to the log directory, the original name is restored. Otherwise, the files will not be recognized by DB2.

Page 34: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

34 July 2006

For example, during archiving, the copy of the file S0000001.LOG put in the archive directory might be renamed to S0000001.LOG.20001130140536.NODE0000. A file restored by brrestore (in the LOG RETRIEVE directory) still has the extended file name.

The name is first truncated back to its original form in the copy returned to the log directory by the User Exit when it is called to retrieve files for a ROLLFORWARD operation.

DB2 log file names are of the format Snnnnnnn.LOG, where nnnnnnn is a seven digit number ranging from 0000000 to 9999999. When a database is first created, log files starting from S0000000.LOG are created. DB2 restarts the log file numbering sequence at S0000000.LOG under the following conditions:

• When the database configuration file is changed to enable archive logging

• When the database configuration file is changed to disable archive logging

• When the log file sequence wraps, that is after log S9999999.LOG is used

The states a log file passes through, which appear in the above graphic, for example, online active, are described in Log File States [Page 37].

Admin Tool Log File Management Model – Indirect Archiving Only Whenever a log file is archived, the Admin Tools also associate it with a database backup timestamp (that is, the date and time of the most recent SAP system database backup operation – whichever was performed most recently). The Admin Tools are then able to tell the database administrator which log files are needed to roll forward a database after a specific backup image has been restored. For more information, see Log File Restore of the SAP Database [Page 148].

In combination with the log file close timestamp (another log file attribute), the backup timestamp allows the Admin Tools to keep track of the restorable backup or log file combinations. The Admin Tools GUI (DB2 Control Center Extensions) also supports this.

Normally, only the Admin Tools should be used to manage log files. The files should not be moved or deleted manually as this will lead to data inconsistencies. The only exception to this is when log files that are no longer supported by the tools (see Invalid in the section Log File States [Page 37]), are restored. Those files must have the timestamp and node extension removed from their names when they are moved back to the log directory.

2.2.4 Log File Deletion Log Files on Disk Log files in the DB2 log directory should not be deleted. The database manager automatically deletes or reuses these files after they have been successfully archived by the User Exit. Depending on the archiving method you choose, the following happens:

• If you chose direct archiving, no log file copies are made on disk and no deletion is needed.

Page 35: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 35

• If you chose indirect archiving, log files copied to the archive directory by the User Exit and later successfully archived using brarchive will only be deleted from the archive directory if this is explicitly requested. The same applies to log files restored to the retrieve directory by brrestore.

In the latter cases deletion is requested by:

• Indicating deletion as part of a brarchive/brrestore operation (options -sd and –ssd).

• Explicitly deleting log files in a later call to an Admin Tool (options -ds and –dr). Log files no longer required on the backend should also be deleted using these tools.

Be aware that the available disk space will eventually be exhausted if the User Exit is unable to successfully archive log files over a long period of time. The same will happen if log files archived using brarchive and restored using brrestore are not deleted using the same tools.

Tapes can be reused, but other backend storage should be cleaned up regularly using the Admin Tools. Storage management products often supply their own tools for doing this or can be configured to automatically remove old files. However, it is essential that you use the Admin Tools to delete files when using indirect archiving, as the Admin DB is then also updated.

Log Files in Long-Term Storage • Tape

If you use a tape as a long-term storage, the Admin DB should always reflect the content of the tapes (in the Admin DB, there is an entry for each log file that is stored on tape). If you reuse a tape that already contains log files, all entries in the Admin DB will automatically be removed before the tape is overwritten with new log files. Therefore the Admin DB does not grow. If you lose a tape or if a tape becomes unreadable, you should delete the tape from the Admin DB to reflect this lost or unreadable tape in the Admin DB. For more information, see Deleting Tapes from the Admin DB [Page 120].

• TSM

If TSM is configured correctly and if you use an archive copy group for storing log files, the log files will automatically be deleted from TSM. If you use indirect archiving, the Admin DB does not recognize the automatic deletion and runs out of sync. To synchronize the Admin DB, you should use brrestore –delete. For more information, see Deleting Log Files [Page 101].

If you use a backup copy group, you need to delete the log files manually. If you use indirect archiving, use brrestore –delete. For more information, see Deleting Log Files [Page 101]. If you use direct archiving, you may use db6adutl to delete the log files.

• Customer script

If you use a customer script, you should use brrestore –delete to delete log files. For more information, see Deleting Log Files [Page 101].

Page 36: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

36 July 2006

2.2.5 Protocols The User Exit (db2uext2), brarchive and brrestore generate protocol information to record the actions that have been performed. Protocol information is also written into the Admin DB by the log file management tools. This information can be used by the DB2 Control Center Extensions. The Admin DB protocols and the protocol files of brarchive and brrestore are eventually deleted by brarchive. The frequency can be configured by setting configuration parameter delete_protocols using the DB2 Control Center Extensions.

Protocol files should only be deleted by the database system administrator.

The protocol files have the following form and are written to the following directories:

Tool Protocol File(s) Location

User Exit db2uext2.log.NODExxxx db2uext2.err.NODExxxx

(Files are appended)

Directory defined by the DIAGPATH configuration parameter (db2 get dbm cfg …)

brarchive brarchive.<timestamp>.lfa

(One file per run)

• For 4.6 D Admin Tools: <INSTHOME>/saparch

• For 6.NN Admin Tools: <INSTHOME>/admintools/ protocols

brrestore brrestore.<timestamp>.lfr

(One file per run)

• For 4.6D Admin Tools <INSTHOME>/saprest

• For 6.NN Admin Tools: <INSTHOME>/admintools/ protocols

These tools can also write more detailed traces, normally only for use by support and development. For more information, see Appendix B: Troubleshooting [Page 177].

2.2.6 Raw Device Log Files To achieve maximum performance, we recommend that you use raw devices for storing log data. This has the effect of bypassing a possible file system management overhead and allows DB2 to manage the log data with optimum efficiency. However, it is generally easier to work with log files in file systems, as these can be maintained and manipulated using standard operating system tools.

The Admin Tools fully support raw logging. The differences between file system-based logging and raw device logging are hidden by the User Exit. The User Exit extracts raw data into individual files that then behave identically to non-raw log files.

If you decide to use raw device logging, the following is necessary to enable roll-forward during database recovery. If logging information cannot be obtained from the log extents available on the raw device, DB2 expects the logs to be in the log overflow directory. To allow the User Exit to put missing logs in the log overflow directory, the ROLLFORWARD utility must specify the overflow log path parameter.

Page 37: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 37

2.2.7 Log File States

This section is mainly written for system administrators and support personnel only for use if problems involving the Admin DB occur.

Within an SAP environment, in order for the tools to know what operations have been performed on a log file, the log file is defined to pass though the following states during its life cycle. This state information is stored in the Admin DB, so it is only relevant to systems using the (default) indirect archiving method. This information is consequently not stored on systems performing direct archiving.

• Online active

The log file is currently being used to log transactions. The location of the log file is defined in the LOGPATH database configuration parameter. This can be either a file system path or a raw device.

• Online retained

The log file is no longer being written to by the database, but may contain information about transactions that the database engine has not yet written from the buffer pool to disk. The log file is located in the log directory, and will also be in the archive directory after the User Exit has run.

• Offline retained

The log file is no longer being used and does not contain transactions with unwritten data pages. The log file is in the archive directory.

The original log file will also remain in LOGPATH until the database is stopped or the DB2 Database Manager reuses the file. However, the tools have no influence on this and so assume that the file is no longer there.

• Archived retained

The log file has been archived using brarchive. The location of the archived log file is a storage management product, for example, TSM (Tivoli Storage Manager) or tape. If not explicitly deleted, the original log file is also still in the archive directory and no restore is possible (or necessary) as long as this original log file has not been deleted using brrestore.

• Restored retained

The log file has been restored using brrestore. The location of the restored log file is the retrieve directory. If not explicitly deleted by using the -delete option in a subsequent operation, the archived log file is also still available on the backend.

• INVALID

The Admin Tools can only administer the latest version of a log file with a given number per node. If the database generates a second log file with a number already used, the User Exit marks previous versions as INVALID. This can occur after a database restore if the ROLLFORWARD operation does not use all log files, or by turning the LOGRETAIN database configuration parameter off and on again. Older log files that have been archived can still be manually retrieved from the backend using system or storage product tools, but the Admin Tools only support the retrieval of the newest version.

Page 38: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

38 July 2006

• Gone

This state is only used internally to indicate that a log file could not be found in the location where it was expected, for example, if a customer uses MOVE, RENAME or DELETE. This state can also occur when storage products, such as TSM, automatically delete files after a certain period of time. A delete operation will delete such entries.

2.2.8 Special Cases - Non-Standard Behavior of Database Systems Certain systems are set up in a slightly non-standard way, for example:

• As split-mirror

• As homogeneous system copy

In both cases the Admin Tools are either restricted or must be configured differently.

Split-Mirror for Backup Purposes DB2 has introduced a new concept known as split-mirror using the db2inidb tool. With this tool, you can rapidly create a mirror copy of a production system database without the need to shut down the system. This copy can then be used to perform an offline backup without affecting the performance of the original system, which continues processing as usual.

For this feature, we strongly recommend customers to only use direct archiving. This requires either TSM or a vendor product that provides its own User Exit.

For more information, see The db2inidb Tool [Page 132].

Homogenous System Copy You can create new SAP systems from existing system backups. In this case, the Admin Tools must be newly installed on the new system as the system name has changed.

Do not attempt to copy Admin DB information from the source system to the new target system.

Although DB2 does not force a backup in this situation, as LOGRETAIN is normally already active, it is essential that you take a new backup before you use the Admin Tools on the new SAP system.

Sometimes a system copy is used to overwrite another system or a previous system copy where the Admin Tools were already installed. In this case, the old Admin DB should be dropped before the Admin Tools are reinstalled. Additionally, the backup history file must be pruned to remove all previous backup information before a new backup is taken and before the Admin Tools are used.

Page 39: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 39

2.3 SAP Security Concept General Information In an SAP environment, DB2 runs with authentication set to the value server_encrypt. This means that the user ID and password provided to connect to databases or attach to database instances are verified by DB2 using operating system services from within the database server.

The user IDs and passwords for SAP system users are maintained and stored in the file:

• UNIX: /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/global/dscdb6.conf

• Windows: \\%DSCDB6HOME%\sapmnt\<SAPSID>\SYS\global\dscdb6.conf

In an exclusively Windows environment, environment variable DSCDB6HOME contains the name of the database server. In a system environment where the database server operates under an operating system other than Windows, DSCDB6HOME should contain the name of the server where file dscdb6.conf can be accessed with the path listed above.

File dscdb6.conf must be accessible from all application and database servers using NFS (UNIX) or Windows shares. Passwords are stored in encrypted form. This file is protected from unauthorized access using file system access authorizations.

For all the dscdb6.conf accesses described in this documentation, environment variable DB2DB6EKEY is used to encrypt or decrypt the requested password.

The value of DB2DB6EKEY must be identical on all application servers, the central instance, and on the SAP system database servers (all systems with the same <SAPSID>).

DB2DB6EKEY is requested and set during SAP system installations. The default value is <DBSID><db_server_hostname>, but will need modifying for all but the central database server.

The administrator can change this value at any time, but this requires that the value be updated on all other related systems, and the passwords in the file dscdb6.conf be changed (see below).

UNIX:

The DB2DB6EKEY variable is set in the SAP profiles dbenv_<hostname>.csh and .dbenv_<hostname>.sh, which are read when <sapsid>adm or db2<dbsid> logs on.

Windows:

The DB2DB6EKEY variable is set in the system environment.

Page 40: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

40 July 2006

Managing Passwords for Database Standard Users DB2 uses operating system users to maintain system security. The Admin Tools need access to the user passwords to access the database. These are stored in encrypted form in a special file and must be updated using the dscdb6up tool.

Do not change user passwords only using operating system methods. Tools that read password file dscdb6.conf will no longer be able to connect to the database until tool dscdb6up has been used.

For information about how to set and update passwords for SAP system users, see Setting and Updating Passwords [Page 116].

2.4 Multi-Partitioned Systems The Admin Tools are also enabled to work with multi-partitioned systems. A multi-partitioned database can be configured to consist of more than one database node. In this case, in the SAP implementation, certain directories found in the single-partitioned environment are extended to become node-specific in a multi-partitioned environment and other directories are moved.

On UNIX, the home directory of the db2<dbsid> user changes from /db2/<DBSID> (single-partitioned system) to /db2/db2<dbsid> (multi-partitioned system).

Also tools such as brarchive and brrestore should be used with the additional parameter –node. For more information about the syntax of brarchive and brrestore, see brarchive - Log File Archive Tool [Page 157] and brrestore - Log File Retrieval Tool [Page 163].

Page 41: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 41

3 Installation and Setup

3.1 Introduction This chapter is intended for administrators who want to check their environment, or need to (re)install or upgrade the Admin Tools manually.

The installation of the Admin Tools depends on the SAP installation tool. You can install the SAP system using:

• R3SETUP

The Admin Tools are automatically installed as part of the SAP system installation. R3SETUP creates the directories, user, groups and user environment that are required to successfully install the Admin Tools using the sddb6ins program.

• SAPinst

The Admin Tools are not automatically installed during the SAP system installation with SAPinst. However, you can install the Admin Tools after installing the SAP system. SAPinst creates the users and groups that are required to successfully install the Admin Tools using the sddb6ins program. Version 6.10 of sddb6ins and higher creates the directories and adds variables to the user environment that are required to run the Admin Tools.

The 6.NN Admin Tools must be used on SAP systems with release 6.10 or higher. They do not perform correctly on SAP systems with release 4.6D or lower, and the 4.6D Admin Tools do not perform correctly on SAP systems with release 6.10 or higher.

Installation Overview The following list provides an overview of the steps that you have to perform to install the Admin Tools and enable the SAP system database for recovery: ...

1. Check the SAP system environment [Page 43] to make sure that the SAP system was installed correctly.

2. Check the prerequisites for the installation of the Admin Tools [Page 48].

3. Install or upgrade to the latest Admin Tools. For more information, see one of the following sections:

Upgrading the Admin Tools [Page 50] if you want to upgrade the Admin Tools to the latest version.

Installing the Latest Admin Tools [Page 51]if you want to install the latest version of the Admin Tools or apply the latest patch.

4. Check the Admin Tools environment [Page 52] after installation.

5. Install the DB2 Control Center on the SAP database server or one or more workstations. For more information, see Installation of the DB2 Control Center [Page 61].

Page 42: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

42 July 2006

You may have already performed this step as part of the database installation. Otherwise, this can be delayed until step 7 if roll-forward recovery enabling (step 6) will be performed on the command line.

6. Enable the database for roll-forward recovery [Page 57].

7. Catalog the databases to be administered. For more information, see Setting Up the DB2 Control Center [Page 62].

8. Check that the DB2 Control Center Extensions are working correctly. For more information, see Using the DB2 Control Center Extensions [Page 69].

See also: • For information about installing IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

with the SAP system, see the following documentation:

For SAP Web AS Release 6.10, 6.20 and 6.30:

SAP Web Application Server Installation on UNIX: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

SAP Web Application Server Installation on Windows 2000: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

To find this documentation, see SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/instguides → SAP Components →SAP Web Application Server.

For SAP Web AS 6.40 SR1:

SAP Web Application Server ABAP 6.40 SR1on UNIX: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

SAP Web Application Server ABAP 6.40 SR1on Windows 2000: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

To find this documentation, see SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/instguidesNW04 → Installation.

For SAP Basis Release 4.6D:

SAP Basis Installation on UNIX: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

SAP Basis Installation on Windows: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

To find this documentation, see SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/instguides → SAP Components →SAP Basis.

For SAP R/3 Release 4.6x and lower:

To find the corresponding documentation, see SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/instguides → SAP Components → SAP R/3.

• For additional information about installing the Admin Tools, see the following SAP Notes:

SAP Note 410252

DB6: Installing the latest 4.6D DB2 Admin Tools

SAP Note 455506

DB6: Installing the latest 6.NN DB2 Admin Tools

To find the SAP Notes, see SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/notes.

Page 43: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 43

3.2 SAP System Environment The following sections explain the SAP system environment that is a prerequisite for the successful installation of the Admin Tools.

3.2.1 SAP System Users and Groups The following tables list the users and groups that are automatically created by the installation tool during the SAP system installation.

SAP System Users

User Description db2<dbsid> Database administrator

This operating system user is the DB2 instance owner and the SAP database administrator.

<sapsid>adm SAP system administrator This operating system user is authorized to start and stop the SAP system and the DB2 Database Manager (instance). <sapsid>adm has the DB2 authorizations DBADM and SYSCTRL. DB2-specific monitoring functions invoked by SAP application server functions require SYSCTRL authorization. This user belongs to the operating system group db<dbsid>ctl.

sapr3

First installed SAP system with Release 4.6D or lower

sap<sapsid>

SAP systems based on SAP Web AS kernel Release 6.10 or higher and additional MCOD 4.6D SAP systems

Database user These operating system users own all SAP database objects (tables, indexes and views). All database connection and instance access operations for an SAP application server are performed using these users.

These users belong to the operating system group SAPSYS and are only created on SAP systems on which the SAP system database has been installed (not on remote application servers). These users have the following database authorizations: CREATETAB, BINDADD, CONNECT, and IMPLICIT_SCHEMA

Windows only: sapse<sapsid>

SAP service account user This operating system user is a virtual user. In general, on Windows the SAP system is started with this user account, but there is no need to log on to the SAP system with it.

This user account must have the local user authorizations to Log on as a service and has to be a member of the local administrator group. The name of this user must be sapse<sapsid>.

Page 44: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

44 July 2006

SAP System Groups

Groups Description db<dbsid>adm Database system administration group

Each member of this group has SYSADM authorization for the DB2 Database Manager instance. This is the highest level of authorization within the database manager and controls all database objects.

db<dbsid>ctl Database system control group Each member of this group has SYSCTRL authorization for the DB2 Database Manager instance. SYSCTRL has authorizations allowing operations affecting system resources, but not allowing direct access to data.

db<dbsid>mnt Database maintenance group

A user of this group can perform maintenance operations on all databases associated with an instance. It does not allow direct access to data. This authority includes privileges to update database configuration files, to back up a database or a tablespace, to restore an existing database and to monitor a database.

Windows only: SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin

Domain-level SAP system administration group This group is used for grouping the SAP system administrators. The sole function of a global group is to gather users together at domain level so that they can be placed in the appropriate local groups. The members of this group are the domain users <sapsid>adm and sapse<sapsid>.

The group SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin is only used when the SAP System belongs to a Windows domain. The group SAP_<SAPSID>_GlobalAdmin is not required for a local installation.

Windows only: SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin

Local group on an application server

Only local groups are created and maintained on an application server. A local group can only be given authorizations to the system where it is located. If the system is part of the domain, the local group can contain users and global groups from the domain.

Page 45: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 45

3.2.2 User Environment

In the following table, the Set In column shows the location where the variables are set and where they need to be changed.

General Environment Variables

Environment Variable

Value Set In

DB2INSTANCE DB2<DBSID> UNIX: ~/.dbenv_<hostname> .csh

and

~/.dbenv_<hostname> .sh

Windows:

User environment

DB2DBDFT <DBSID> Same as relevant location for variable DB2INSTANCE as described in this table

DB2DB6EKEY <SAPSID><database server name> (default value)

Same as relevant location for variable DB2INSTANCE as described in this table

INSTHOME UNIX: Home directory of user db2<dbsid>

Windows: Default value for a single-partitioned system: <drive>:\DB2<DBSID> Default value for a multi-partitioned system: \\%DSCDB6HOME%\db2<dbsid>

UNIX: ~/.dbenv_<hostname> .csh

and

~/.dbenv_<hostname> .sh

Windows: User environment

SAPSYSTEMNAME <SAPSID> UNIX: ~/.sapenv_<hostname> .csh

and

~/.sapenv_<hostname> .sh

Windows: User environment

Page 46: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

46 July 2006

dbs_db6_schema

Valid for all SAP systems with SAP Web AS 6.10 or higher and MCOD 4.6D SAP systems

Database schema:

sap<sapsid> or sapr3 depending on the SAP system release you have installed.

Same as relevant location for variable SAPSYSTEMNAME as described in this table

Additional Environment Variables for Windows

Environment Variable Value DSCDB6HOME Database server name

SAPMNT <drive>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>

SAPEXE <drive>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\SYS\exe\run

3.2.3 Access Authorizations for Admin Tool-Related Directories Access Authorizations for Directories and Files under UNIX

DB2 Directory or File Access Privilege in Octal

Form

Owner Group

Home directory of user

db2<dbsid> (/db2/<DBSID> or /db2/db2<dbsid>)

755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

/db2/<DBSID>/log_dir 750 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

/db2/<DBSID>/log_retrieve 750 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

/db2/<DBSID>/log_archive 750 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

/db2/<DBSID>/db2dump 750 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/exe 755 <sapsid>adm sapsys

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/ global

750

<sapsid>adm db<dbsid>adm

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/exe/run/dscdb6up

4750 root db<dbsid>ctl

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/ global/dscdb6.conf

640

<sapsid>adm db<dbsid>adm

All authorizations can be checked using the –checkonly option of the sddb6ins program.

Page 47: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 47

Access Authorizations for Directories and Files under Windows

Directory Access Privilege

Owner For User or Group

<drive>:\db2<dbsid> Full Control

Administrator SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin, System

<drive>:\db2 Full Control

Administrator Everyone

<drive>:\db2\<dbsid>\ log_dir

Full Control

Administrator db2<dbsid>, System

<drive>:\db2\<dbsid>\ log_retrieve

Full Control

Administrator SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin, System

<drive>:\db2\<dbsid\ log_archive

Full Control

Administrator SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin, System

<drive>:\db2\<dbsid>\ db2dump

Full Control

Administrator SAP_<SAPSID>_LocalAdmin, System

3.3 Installing the Admin Tools Manually

The 4.6D Admin Tools must be used on all SAP systems with release 3.1I − 4.6D where DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 7 or higher is installed.

The Admin Tools are installed on the database server using program sddb6ins. During normal installation of an SAP system with R3SETUP, sddb6ins is called automatically.

The administrator only needs to execute sddb6ins manually in the following cases:

• If an SAP system was installed with SAPinst

• If you want to use the 4.6D Admin Tools and your SAP system is between Release 3.1I and 4.6C

• After completion of an SAP system upgrade and if you have not yet installed the latest Admin Tools

• When applying a downward compatible kernel and if you have not yet installed the latest Admin Tools

• When manually installing the Admin Tools or applying an Admin Tools patch

• When checking the installation of the Admin Tools

Page 48: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

48 July 2006

3.3.1 Prerequisites for the Admin Tools Installation Before you can install the Admin Tools, you must make sure that certain prerequisites are met. Some are general, some apply to a certain patch level of the sddb6ins program or depend on your operating system.

General Prerequisites • Sufficient space

Make sure that you have sufficient space (approx. 4 MB) in the directory containing the Admin Tools executables. sddb6ins installs the executables in the following directory:

For 6.NN Admin Tools:

UNIX: $INSTHOME/admintools/bin

Windows: %INSTHOME%\admintools\bin

For 4.6D Admin Tools

UNIX: /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/exe/run

Windows: <drive>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\SYS\exe\run

If you are using indirect archiving (that is parameter -NODADMDB is not used during installation), the Admin DB requires additional space. The directory to which the database manager configuration parameter DFTDBPATH is pointing must be large enough to hold the Admin DB and its log files (approx. 4 MB).

• Availability of the database instance

The SAP database instance DB2<DBSID> must be running when installation program sddb6ins is executed.

• Correct user environment

Program sddb6ins must be executed in the correct user environment.

Windows:

To start sddb6ins.exe, log on to the database server as user <sapsid>adm.

When working with Microsoft Cluster, sddb6ins.exe must be executed on all cluster nodes. For this, set the environment variable DB2INSTANCE to db2<dbsid> (instead of db2l<dbsid>) in the local command window. The database resource has to run on the actual cluster node.

UNIX:

To run sddb6ins, you require root authorization with the <sapsid>adm user environment. Log on as <sapsid>adm and then change to user root using su.

Do not use su - to change to user root because the db2<dbsid> user environment is then lost.

Page 49: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 49

UNIX only: For SAP Systems lower than 4.6x If you want to install the 4.6D Admin Tools for the first time on SAP systems lower than 4.6x, you have to perform the following additional steps as the group concept changed with Release 4.6A: ...

1. Create two new groups called db<dbsid>ctl and db<dbsid>adm if they do not already exist.

2. Change the primary group of user db<dbsid> to db<dbsid>adm and keep group sysadm as the secondary group.

3. Add group db<dbsid>ctl as the secondary group to user <sapsid>adm.

4. Update the database manager configuration.

To do so, log on to the database server as user db2<dbsid> and enter the following commands: db2 update dbm cfg using SYSADM_GROUP db<dbsid>adm

db2 update dbm cfg using SYSCTRL_GROUP db<dbsid>ctl

5. Perform an instance update to correct the file authorizations of executables, for example, db2start:

a. Log on to the database server as user db2<dbsid> and stop the DB2 instance. Enter the following command: db2stop force

b. As user root, switch to the instance directory and update the DB2 instance. Enter the following commands: cd <DB2 installation directory>/instance

./db2iupdt db2<dbsid>

c. Log on again as user db2<dbsid> and restart the DB2 instance. Enter the following command: db2start

6. Download the dscdb6up program from SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/patches.

7. To extract dscdb6up using CAR, enter the following command:

CAR -xvf dscdb6up.CAR

8. Copy the dscdb6up program to directory /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/exe/run.

9. Use chmod and chown to set the authorizations as follows:

File Permission Owner Group

<SAPMNT>/SYS/exe/run/dscdb6up 4750 root db<dbsid>ctl

<SAPMNT>/SYS/global 750 <sapsid>adm

db<dbsid>adm

<SAPMNT>/SYS/global/dscd6.conf 640 <sapsid>adm

db<dbsid>adm

<SAPMNT> acts as a place holder for /usr/sap/<SAPSID>.

Page 50: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

50 July 2006

3.3.2 General Information Return Codes of sddb6ins The sddb6ins program writes information about the steps it performs to standard output. The return code of the sddb6ins program depends on the success of the installation. The following table describes the possible return codes:

Return Code Description 0 No error detected

1 Severe errors detected, the installation is not complete. For more information, see Appendix B: Troubleshooting [Page 177].

2 Warning. Errors have occurred during the installation but the installation is complete. Check the output messages.

The values listed in the table above differ from other Admin Tools.

Abbreviation of sddb6ins Options The following options of the sddb6ins program are not listed in detail in the sections Upgrading the Admin Tools [Page 50], Installing the Latest Admin Tools [Page 51] and Checking the Admin Tool Environment [Page 52]. Instead, {common option} acts as a placeholder for the following three options:

• [-s <SAPSID>]

• [-db2dbnamepwd <pwd>] [-db2dbnamedomain <domain>]

• [-sidadmpwd <pwd>] [-sidadmdomain <domain>]

• [-NOADMDB]

• [-DEB [<level>]]

For a detailed description of these options, see Appendix A: Tool Command Line Parameters [Page 157].

3.3.3 Upgrading the Admin Tools Use You use the -u option of the sddb6ins program to upgrade the Admin Tools. The following conditions apply:

• If you have performed an upgrade to an SAP system with Release 4.6D or lower but you are still using a version of the Admin Tools from before 4.6D, an upgrade to the latest 4.6D Admin Tools is strongly recommended.

Page 51: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 51

• If you upgrade to an SAP system Release 6.10 or higher, an upgrade to the 6.NN Admin Tools is required.

If you are using an SAP system with Release 4.6D or lower and you want to use the 6.NN Admin Tools, Admin Tools upgrades are not supported.

Procedure To upgrade the Admin Tools, enter the following command: sddb6ins -u <start release> [<target release>] {common options}

<start release> is a placeholder for the release of the previously installed Admin Tools.

For example, to upgrade the Admin Tools from 4.6D to 6.10 using the 6.10 sddb6ins executable:

UNIX: sddb6ins –u 46D

Windows: sddb6ins –u 46D –db2dbnamepwd <password of user db2<dbsid>>

If the -NOADMDB option is used, the Admin DB will not be installed. In this case log file archiving is only performed directly by the User Exit program db2uext2 (for more information, see Archiving Directly to TSM [Page 80]). Otherwise, the Admin DB will be installed (if not already present) and brarchive and brrestore are then also available.

See also:

Actions Performed by the sddb6ins Program [Page 53]

3.3.4 Installing the Latest Admin Tools Use You use the -i option in the following cases:

• You have to install the latest Admin Tools manually after an SAP system installation of Release 6.10 or higher.

• You want to apply an Admin Tools patch for the currently installed Admin Tools.

However, you must make sure that you are using a patch that is valid for the same release of the currently installed Admin Tools.

Procedure To manually install the latest Admin Tools or to apply an Admin Tools patch, enter the following command: sddb6ins -i [<target release>] {common options}

Page 52: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

52 July 2006

For example, to install the current version of the Admin Tools, enter the following command:

UNIX: sddb6ins –i

Windows: sddb6ins –i –db2dbnamepwd <password of user db2<dbsid>>

If the -NOADMDB option is used, the Admin DB will not be installed. In this case log file archiving is only performed directly by the User Exit program db2uext2 (for more information, see Archiving Directly to TSM [Page 80]). Otherwise, the Admin DB will be installed (if not already present) and brarchive and brrestore are then also available.

On Windows, make sure that environment variable INSTHOME is set correctly:

• In a multi-host environment, INSTHOME must point to a Windows share (default directory \\<instance-owning host>\db2<dbsid>).

• In a single-host environment, INSTHOME must point to an existing directory, for example, d:\db2\db2<dbsid>.

The directory name must not contain any spaces.

The -a option of sddb6ins, which was used to install the latest Admin Tools after the installation of a downward-compatible kernel (DCK), no longer exists. Use the -i option instead.

See also:

Actions Performed by the sddb6ins Program [Page 51]

3.3.5 Checking the Admin Tools Environment Use You use option –checkonly to verify the Admin Tools installation. The verification routine checks if:

• The environments for user db2<dbsid> and <sapsid>adm are set correctly.

• The necessary files and directories exist and have the correct authorizations.

• The DB2 instance variable DB2ENVLIST is set correctly.

• The database configuration parameters LOGRETAIN and USEREXIT are set to ON for the SAP database <DBSID>.

• UNIX only: Users and groups are set up correctly.

• Windows only: The required shares exist.

Page 53: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 53

Procedure To check the environment of the Admin Tools, enter the following command: sddb6ins –checkonly [<target release>] {common options}

For example, to check the Admin Tools, enter the following command:

UNIX: sddb6ins –checkonly

Windows: sddb6ins –checkonly –db2dbnamepwd <password of user db2<dbsid>>

With the sddb6ins version 6.10 or higher, this verification is also performed automatically at the end of an installation (–i) or upgrade (-u) operation. The output contains useful information about the environment in which the Admin Tools operate. The verification tool writes the following message types:

Message Type

Description

[I] Provides information about the current configuration.

[E] Severe configuration errors have occurred during the installation.

[W] Warnings if possible inconsistencies have been detected

3.3.6 Actions Performed by the sddb6ins Program The following section describes the actions performed by the sddb6ins program during the installation (option -i) or upgrade (option -u) of the Admin Tools:

Actions Performed During Installation (-i) The sddb6ins program performs the following actions:

• 6.NN Admin Tools only:

The following table lists the directories that are created by sddb6ins:

Directory Description

• UNIX: $INSTHOME/admintools

• Windows: %INSTHOME%\admintools

Admin Tools directory, also contains the environment file init<DBSID>.db6.

• UNIX: $INSTHOME/admintools/bin

• Windows: %INSTHOME%\admintools\bin

Contains the Admin Tools executables and libraries.

Page 54: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

54 July 2006

• UNIX: $INSTHOME/admintools/TraceFiles

• Windows: %INSTHOME%\admintools\TraceFiles

Contains the trace files created by all Admin Tools.

• UNIX: $INSTHOME/admintools/protocols

• Windows: %INSTHOME%\admintools\protocols

Contains brarchive and brrestore protocol files.

User Exit protocol files are in the DIAGPATH directory.

• 6.NN Admin Tools on Windows only:

In a multi-partitioned system, sddb6ins creates the following shares on the node where hostname matches the contents of the variable DSCDB6HOME:

log_archive<DBSID>

log_retrieve<DBSID>

• Extracts the executables stored in sddb6ins to the following directory:

For 6.NN Admin Tools:

<INSTHOME>/admintools/bin

For 4.6D Admin Tools:

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/exe/run

• Copies the User Exit program db2uext2 to the DB2 directory:

UNIX: $INSTHOME/sqllib/adm

Windows: <DB2_install_dir>\sqllib\bin

• Copies the stored procedure sddb6jds, which is required for the DB2 Control Center Extensions, to the DB2 directory.

UNIX: $INSTHOME/sqllib/function

Windows: <DB2_install_dir>\sqllib\function

• 6.NN Admin Tools only:

Removes executables installed with previous versions, which are no longer required. The Admin Tools up to 4.6D were stored in the same directory as the standard SAP system executables and were therefore deleted during an SAP system upgrade.

• Creates or updates the environment file init<DBSID>.db6 in the following directory:

For 6.NN Admin Tools: <INSTHOME>/admintools directory (see table above)

For 4.6D Admin Tools: /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/global

For an example of the environment file, see Appendix D: Example of File init<DBSID>.db6 [Page 212].

Page 55: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 55

• By default, sddb6ins creates the Admin DB ADM<DBSID> if it does not already exist and performs the following actions:

Customizes a multi-partitioned system.

Grants the access authorizations to the Admin DB ADM<DBSID>.

If required, it creates the tables in the Admin DB and fills the configuration table with default values if this table is empty.

4.6D Admin Tools only:

Creates mirror tables in the <DBSID> database.

If you use the –NOADMDB option, the Admin Tool creation will be suppressed. The Admin DB will not be created then and the above steps will not be performed. If you want to use indirect archiving, do not use the –NOADMDB option.

• 4.6D Admin Tools only:

Creates a user defined function (UDF) entry in the <DBSID> database.

• 6.NN Admin Tools only:

Adds Admin Tools-specific environment variables, for example for TSM, to the environment of db2<dbsid> and <sapsid>adm.

• Sets the DB2 instance variable DB2ENVLIST, so that the stored procedure works properly.

• UNIX only:

Sets the access authorizations on the Admin Tools directories and files as follows:

6.NN Admin Tools

Directory or File Access Privilege in Octal Form

Owner Group

$INSTHOME/admintools 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/admintools/bin 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/admintools/protocols 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/admintools/TraceFiles 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/admintools/init<DBSID>. db6

0644 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/admintools/bin/brarchive 6755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/admintools/bin/brrestore 6755 root db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/admintools/bin/libdb6tp.[o|so|sl]

0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/admintools/bin/libdb6ds.[o|so|sl]

0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/admintools/bin/libdb6sc.[o|so|sl]

0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

Page 56: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

56 July 2006

$INSTHOME/admintools/bin/libdb6sctsm.smp

0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/admintools/bin/db6adutl 6755 root db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/sqllib/adm/db2uext2 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/sqllib/function/sddb6jds 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

4.6D Admin Tools

Directory or File Access Privileg

e in Octal Form

Owner Group

$INSTHOME/saparch

$INSTHOME/saprest

0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

/tmp/TraceFiles 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

/usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/global/ init<DBSID>.db6

0640 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

<SAPEXE>/brarchive 6755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

<SAPEXE>/brrestore 6755 root db<dbsid>adm

<SAPEXE>/libdb6tp.[o|so|sl] 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

<SAPEXE>/libdb6ds.[o|so|sl] 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

<SAPEXE>/libdb6sc.[o|so|sl] 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

<SAPEXE>/db6sctsm.smp 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

<SAPEXE>/db6adutl 6755 root db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/sqllib/adm/db2uext2 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

$INSTHOME/sqllib/function/sddb6jds 0755 db2<dbsid> db<dbsid>adm

<SAPEXE> is a placeholder for /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/exe/run.

• Inserts the Admin Tools release into the Admin DB.

• 6.10 Admin Tools only:

Checks the installation of the Admin Tools using, for example, the –checkonly option, which is described in Appendix A: Tool Command Line Parameters [Page 157] and Appendix B: Troubleshooting [Page 177].

Page 57: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 57

Actions Performed During Upgrade (-u) The actions performed during upgrade are similar to the actions performed during installation. However, some actions depend on the <start release> parameter.

The sddb6ins program performs the following additional actions:

• If starting with 3.1I Admin Tools:

The 3.1I init<DBSID>.sap configuration file content is moved to the Admin DB.

• 4.0B − 4.6A Admin Tools

The log archive location must be changed. Any log files in the old location are moved and the Admin Database is updated.

• 3.1I − 4.6C Admin Tools

The executables and libraries are exchanged.

3.3.7 Special Configurations This section provides information about special configurations that apply in the case of multiple SAP systems on one database (MCOD) or if you are using a multi-partitioned database system:

• MCOD

For SAP systems with Release 4.6D:

The Admin Tools are only enabled for the main SAP system that is the firstly installed SAP system. The Admin Tools do not support any additionally installed SAP system .

For SAP systems with Release 6.10 or higher:

Call the sddb6ins program for all <sapsid>adm users to enable the Admin Tools environment for all SAP systems that are installed on one database.

• Multi-partitioned database systems

If you are using a multi-partitioned database system, which is the default for an SAP BW installation, and more than one database node is used, you must call sddb6ins on each host where a database node of the database <DBSID> exists.

• Multi-partitioned database systems on UNIX only:

If you want to use indirect archiving, you have to split the database installation over several nodes (computers). The archive and retrieve directories must be mounted on all nodes using NFS. You must export the archive and retrieve directories on one node and mount these directories on all other nodes using NFS. You need to use the same path on all nodes for the archive and retrieve directory.

3.3.8 Enabling the Database for Rollforward Recovery As outlined in Basic Concepts [Page 23], SAP and IBM recommend that the database system be operated in roll-forward recovery mode (LOGRETAIN) with the USEREXIT database parameter turned on. In this mode, the active log files, in which all database changes are

Page 58: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

58 July 2006

recorded, are archived by the User Exit program db2uext2 when they are no longer needed for processing transactions. Log file numbering increases with each new log file (up to 9999999).

Roll-forward recovery is not enabled by default. You enable roll-forward recovery and the User Exit mechanism by setting the database configuration parameters LOGRETAIN and USEREXIT to ON. An offline backup of the database must be performed after setting these parameters. The procedures differ depending whether you are using a single-partitioned or multi-partitioned system.

Unlike with an offline backup, if you want to perform online backups, the database must be in roll-forward recovery mode, that is LOGRETAIN must be set to ON.

There are ways of forcing the database out of BACKUP PENDING mode after setting these parameters without performing a backup first. Do not do this, as the Admin Tools will not operate correctly until a backup has been performed.

System copies created by restoring a database backup will also not force a new backup if the LOGRETAIN parameter was already ON for the original database. A new backup must be performed before the User Exit is called.

See also:

Enabling Rollforward Recovery for a Single-Partitioned Database [Page 58]

Enabling Rollforward Recovery for a Multi-Partitioned Database [Page 59]

3.3.8.1 Enabling Rollforward Recovery for a Single-Partitioned Database Updating Database Parameters You can perform these actions either using the command line or the DB2 Control Center.

DB2 Command Line on the Database Server ...

1. Log on to the database server as user db2<dbsid>.

2. Windows only: Start the DB2 Command Window.

3. To update the database configuration parameters, enter the following commands: db2 update db cfg for <DBSID> using USEREXIT ON

db2 update db cfg for <DBSID> using LOGRETAIN ON

4. Restart the database instance. ...

Page 59: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 59

DB2 Control Center

Make sure that you have installed and set up the DB2 Control Center before performing these steps. For more information, see Installation of the DB2 Control Center [Page 61] and Setting Up the DB2 Control Center [Page 62].

1. Start the DB2 Control Center.

2. From the context menu of the <DBSID> database icon, choose Configure.

3. Choose Logs of the notebook.

4. Choose Retain log files for roll-forward recovery from the list.

5. In the value area, select the Yes radio button.

6. To confirm, choose OK to confirm.

7. Restart the database instance. ...

Backing Up the Database After having updated the database configuration parameters, back up your database. For more information, see Performing the Backup [Page 111].

3.3.8.2 Enabling Rollforward Recovery for a Multi-Partitioned Database Updating Database Parameters You can perform these actions either using the command line or the DB2 Control Center.

DB2 Command Line on the Database Server ...

1. Log on to the database server as user db2<dbsid>.

2. To update the database configuration parameters, enter the following commands: db2_all "db2 update db cfg for <DBSID> using LOGRETAIN ON"

db2_all "db2 update db cfg for <DBSID> using USEREXIT ON"

3. Restart the database instance. ..

DB2 Control Center

Make sure that you have installed and set up the DB2 Control Center before performing these steps. For more information, see Installation of the DB2 Control Center [Page 61] and Setting Up the DB2 Control Center [Page 62].

1. Start the DB2 Control Center.

2. From the context menu of the <DBSID> database icon, choose Open → Database Partitions….

3. In the table Database Partitions, Select all nodes.

4. From the menu that appears, select Configure….

Page 60: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

60 July 2006

5. Choose Logs of the notebook.

6. Select Retain log files for roll-forward recovery from the list.

7. In the value area, choose the Yes radio button.

8. To confirm, choose OK.

9. Restart the database instance. ...

Backing Up the Database After having updated the database configuration parameters, back up your database. For more information, see Performing the Backup [Page 111].

3.3.9 Deinstalling the Admin Tools Use You can deinstall the Admin Tools with option –d of sddb6ins. This can be useful if you:

• Want to use other log file management tools

• Migrate to DB2 Version 8.2, which includes its own log file management

• Want to start the Admin Tools installation from scratch

This option performs the following actions:

• It removes the Admin Tool executables.

• It removes environment file init<DBSID>.db6.

• It drops the Admin DB.

• For the 4.6D Admin Tools: It drops the mirror tables from the <DBSID> database.

Procedure To deinstall the Admin Tools, enter the following command: sddb6ins –d

3.4 Installation and Setup of the DB2 Control Center Extensions The Admin Tools have a user interface that is integrated into the DB2 Control Center as a set of extensions. As it is Java-based, it is available on all platforms which support Java. It can be run remotely, such as on a PC. To be able to use this interface, you must install the DB2 Control Center first.

Page 61: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 61

3.4.1 Installation of the DB2 Control Center The DB2 Control Center is part of the DB2 Client Software called the DB2 Administration Client, and also part of the DB2 server installation.

To install it, follow the standard DB2 installation process and make sure that you select the option Control Center for installation. On a UNIX based operating system, you can start the DB2 Control Center by executing command db2cc. On Windows, there is also a menu entry in the DB2 group in the Start menu.

The DB2 Control Center of DB2 Version 7 or lower does not support 64-bit instances in general. In order to work with 64-bit systems, the DRDA protocol must be used. This is available with all single- and multi-partitioned systems. On all other systems, install DB2 Connect in addition.

3.4.2 Installing the DB2 Control Center Extensions The DB2 Control Center Extensions can only be installed after the DB2 Control Center has been installed.

If you use the direct archiving mode to archive the log files, the DB2 Control Center Extensions are not required,.

On Windows: ...

1. Log on to the machine where you want to install the Admin Tools as a user with local administration authorizations.

2. Insert the SAP kernel CD.

3. On the CD, change to the directory NT\I386\DBTOOLS.

4. Extract file DB6CCEXT.SAR to a temporary directory by using tool SAPCAR.

5. Change to the temporary directory.

6. Invoke setup.exe and follow the instructions.

For the DB2 Control Center Extensions to perform correctly, the DB2 variable DB2INSTANCE must have the same value in the system environment and the environment of the user who starts the DB2 Control Center.

Page 62: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

62 July 2006

On UNIX: ...

1. Log on to the machine where you want to install the DB2 Control Center Extension as user root.

2. Insert the SAP kernel CD.

3. Mount the CD.

4. On the CD, change to the directory UNIX/<Unix platform>/DBTOOLS.

5. Extract file DB6CCEXT.SAR to a temporary directory by using SAPCAR.

6. Change to the temporary directory.

7. Invoke the shell script install and follow the instructions

3.4.3 Setting Up the DB2 Control Center The DB2 Control Center Extensions are available for SAP databases and instances. If the DB2 Control Center is not running on the same machine as the SAP database, it is necessary to catalog the remote computer, the SAP database and its instance. These tasks have to be performed by an user with administrative authorizations.

Cataloging Databases on 32-Bit DB2 Instances

If communication error messages appear while performing actions in this section, the DB2 Administration instance (db2das) may not be running on the computer being cataloged or communication may not be set up correctly. Refer to the DB2 documentation for setting up and starting the DB2 Administration instance and the DB2 Messages Reference.

Cataloging a Remote Computer: ...

1. In the navigation frame of the DB2 Control Center, choose Systems from the context menu.

2. Choose Add from the menu.

The Add System dialog box appears.

Page 63: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 63

3. To retrieve a list of DB2 systems located in the network, choose Refresh.

4. If available, choose the system on which the SAP database server is located. If the system is not listed, enter the name of the server in the System Name field. Fill out or modify the remaining fields.

5. To add this and further systems, choose Apply. Otherwise, confirm with OK.

Page 64: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

64 July 2006

Cataloging a Database Manager Instance: 1. In the navigation frame of the DB2 Control Center, expand the node with the name of

the system where the DB2 server is located.

2. From the context menu of the Instances subnode, choose Add.

The Add Instance dialog box appears.

3. To retrieve a list of instances on the chosen system, choose Refresh.

4. If available, select the instance from the list in the Remote Instance field. If the instance is not listed, enter the name of the instance in the Remote Instance field and fill out the remaining fields. The service name should have the value sapdb2<DBSID> and is defined in the file /etc/services on the database server.

5. To add this and further instances, choose Apply. Otherwise, confirm with OK.

Page 65: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 65

Cataloging the Databases <DBSID> and ADM<DBSID>: ...

1. In the navigation frame of the DB2 Control Center, expand the <system name> node, then the instances node, and the <instance name> node.

2. From the context menu of the Databases node, choose Add.

The Add Database dialog box appears.

3. To retrieve the list of databases created on the instance, choose Refresh.

4. If available, choose the SAP database <DBSID> in the Database Name field. If the database is not listed, enter the name of the database in the Database Name field. The other fields are optional.

5. Confirm the entry by choosing Apply.

6. In the same way, select the Admin DB ADM<DBSID> in the Database Name field, or enter the name by overwriting the previous entry.

7. Confirm the entries with OK.

Cataloging Databases on 64-Bit DB2 Instances With DB2 Version 8, cataloging databases on 64-bit DB2 instances is the same process as on 32-bit DB2 instances. The DB2 Control Center of DB2 Version 8 provides the same functionality for both instance types as long as your database is DB2 Version 8.

If you want to access a DB2 Version 7 64-bit instance using DB2 Control Center Version 8, you must configure the DRDA communication protocol to enable communication. Be aware, however, that in this case only limited functionality is available.

With DB2 Version 7, the DB2 Control Center does not provide all functions on 64-bit DB2 instances. To use the DB2 Control Center for DB2 Version 7 for the administration of 64-bit DB2 instances, you must use the communication protocol DRDA.

Cataloging Databases to Use Communication Protocol DRDA To be able to use communication protocol DRDA, the SAP database <DBSID> and Admin DB ADM<DBSID> must be cataloged in a special procedure. On Windows, you can use the Client Configuration Assistant or the command line processor. On UNIX, you can only catalog the databases using the command line.

Page 66: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

66 July 2006

Using the DB2 Version 7 Client Configuration Assistant ...

1. Log on as a user with administrative authorizations. If the computer is a member of a domain, the user must have domain administrator authorizations.

2. Start the Client Configuration Environment by choosing Start → Programs → IBM DB2 → Client Configuration Assistant.

The Client Configuration Assistant dialog box appears.

3. Choose Add.

The Add Database Wizard - 1. Source screen appears.

4. Choose Manually configure a connection to a database.

5. To continue, choose Next.

The Add Database Wizard - 2. Protocol screen appears.

6. Select TCP/IP.

7. To be able to connect to the server, select The database physically resides on a host or AS/400 system.

If this option does not appear, you have not installed DRDA support on the client.

8. Select Connect directly to the server.

9. To continue, choose Next.

The Add Database Wizard - 3. TCP/IP screen appears.

10. In the Host Name field, enter the host name where the SAP database is running.

11. In the Port Number field, enter the port number of the database instance.

You can find the port number in the following file on the database host. The location depends on the host operating system:

• Windows: <WindowsSystemDirectory>\system32\drivers\etc\services

• UNIX: /etc/services

Look for the entry sapdb2<DBSID>.

12. To continue, choose Next.

The Add Database Wizard - 4. Database screen appears.

13. Enter the name of the SAP database and choose Next twice.

The Add Database Wizard - 6. Node Option screen appears.

14. In the System Name field, enter the name of the database host.

15. In the Instance Name field, enter the DB2 instance name.

16. Choose the corresponding operating system.

Page 67: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 67

17. Choose Finish.

The Confirmation dialog box appears. To test the connection, choose Test Connection, enter the user ID and password, and choose OK.

18. To repeat the procedure for the Admin DB ADM<DBSID>, choose Add and repeat steps 13 to 17.

Using the DB2 Version 8 Configuration Client Assistant

1. Log on as a user with administrator authorizations. If the computer is a member of a domain, the user must have domain administrator authorizations.

2. Start the client configuration environment by choosing Start → Programs → IBM DB2 → Set-up Tools → Configuration Assistant.

The Client Configuration Assistant dialog box appears.

3. Choose Selected → Add Database Using Wizard…

The Add Database Wizard – 1. Source screen appears.

4. Select Manually configure a connection to a database.

5. To continue, choose Next.

The Add Database Wizard – 2. Protocol screen appears.

6. Select TCP/IP.

7. To be able to connect to the server, select The database physically resides on a host or AS/400 system.

If this option does not appear, you have not installed DRDA support on the client.

8. Select Connect directly to the server.

9. To continue, choose Next.

The Add Database Wizard – 3. TCP/IP screen appears.

10. In the Host name field, enter the host name where the SAP database is running.

11. In the Port number field, enter the port number of the database instance.

You can find the port number on the database host in the following file:

• UNIX: /etc/services

• Windows: <Windows_system_directory>\system32\drivers\etc\services

Look for the entry sapdb2<DBSID>.

12. To continue, choose Next.

The Add Database Wizard – 4. Database screen appears.

13. Enter the name of the SAP database and choose Next.

The Add Database Wizard – 5. Data Source screen appears.

14. Deselect Register this database for ODBC and choose Next.

The Add Database Wizard – 6. Node Option screen appears.

Page 68: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

68 July 2006

15. Choose the corresponding operating system.

16. In the Remote instance name field, enter the DB2 instance name and choose Next.

The Add Database Wizard – 7. System Options screen appears.

17. To continue, choose Next.

The Add Database Wizard – 8. Security Options screen appears.

18. Select User authentication value in server’s DBM configuration.

19. To continue, choose Next.

The Add Database Wizard – 8 DCS Options screen appears.

20. Select Configure DCS options.

21. Select Disconnect if client generates an interrupt (INTERRUPT_ENABLED).

22. Choose Finish.

The Test Connection dialog box appears.

23. Select CLI and enter the user ID and password.

24. Choose Test Connection.

25. To check for a successful test connection, choose the Results tab. In case of a success, the following message is displayed:

CLI connection tested successfully

26. To add the Admin DB ADM<DBSID>, repeat steps 1 to 22.

Using the Command Line ...

1. Log on as a user with SYSADM authorization, for example, db2<dbsid>.

2. Enter the following commands in the sequence given (use db2<dbsid> as <nodeName>):

db2 catalog tcpip node <nodeName> remote <dbHostName> server <portNumber>

You can find the port number on the database host in the following file:

UNIX: /etc/services

Windows: %SystemRoot%\system32\drivers\etc\services

Look for the entry sapdb2<DBSID>.

db2 catalog db <DBSID> at node <nodeName> authentication dcs

db2 catalog dcs db <DBSID> parms ',,INTERRUPT_ENABLED,,,,,'

db2 catalog db ADM<DBSID> at node <nodeName> authentication dcs

db2 catalog dcs db ADM<DBSID> parms ',,INTERRUPT_ENABLED,,,,,'

Page 69: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 69

3.4.4 Using the DB2 Control Center Extensions After cataloging the databases, the DB2 Control Center Extensions can now be used. You can access the DB2 Control Center Extensions using new context menu entries, which have been added to the standard DB2 Control Center menus at the instance and database levels.

The <DBSID> database context menu contains three entries: SAP Options Management, SAP Log File Management and SAP Tape Management.

For more information about how to use the option SAP Option Management, see Parameters Affecting Log File Management Storage [Page 70].

For more information about how to use the option SAP Log File Management, see Advanced Log File Maintenance Tasks [Page 117].

Page 70: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

70 July 2006

4 Configuration

4.1 Changing the Admin Tools Configuration The following sections describes how you can change the configuration of the Admin Tools. There are two locations where parameters may need to be changed:

• In the DB2 Control Center Extensions (only necessary for indirect archiving).

For more information, see Parameters Affecting Log File Management Storage [Page 70].

• In the environment file init<DBSID>.db6

For more information, see Configuring the Admin Tools Using Environment Files [Page 73].

4.1.1 Parameters Affecting Log File Management Storage If you have decided to use the default behavior of archiving log files indirectly via disk, the Admin DB will have been created. The Admin DB keeps track of the location and states of all log files. Furthermore, it contains several configuration parameters for the log file management tools.

To view or to change the parameters, proceed as follows: ...

1. In the navigation frame of the DB2 Control Center, choose the database <DBSID> using the context menu.

If you are using the DB2 Control Center Extensions with a patch level lower than 3, you choose the database instance db2<dbsid> (containing the <DBSID> database) using context menu.

Page 71: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 71

2. Choose SAP Option Management.

The Options dialog box appears. The following is an example from an AIX system.

When you select a parameter, its description is displayed in the field at the bottom of the dialog box.

3. To change the value of a selected parameter, double-click on the Value field.

4. Enter the new values.

The following parameters can be set in the Options dialog box:

Parameter Description backup_dev_type Default storage management product, if not given on the

command line. Initially set to tape, but can be set to adsm for TSM.

Do not set this value to tsm.

cpio_flags Flags used to modify the cpio command when archiving files to tape. These may need modifying if a non-standard block size is used. For more information, see Indirect Archiving to Tape [Page 82] section Modifying the Tape Block Size.

cpio_in_flags Flags used to modify the cpio command when restoring files from tape. These may need modifying if a non-standard block size is used. For more information, see Indirect Archiving to Tape [Page 82] section Modifying the Tape Block Size.

Page 72: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

72 July 2006

rewind Command used to rewind a tape. The $ is replaced by the tape device name. This value should not normally be changed.

rewind_offline Command used to rewind a tape and then place it offline (some devices eject the tape). The $ is replaced by the tape device name. This value should not normally be changed.

tape_pos_cmd Command used to a spool a tape forwards. The first $ is replaced by the tape device name. The second $ is replaced by a number indicating the number of files to spool forward by. This value should not be changed.

tape_size Indicates the default size of tapes. It is only used to suggest how much data might fit on a tape, but may be ignored. M indicates megabytes. This value is used to set the default value for all user-defined tape devices.

tape_address Non-rewind address of the default tape device. Using this address ensures that the tape is not rewound at the end of each tape operation. For more information about non-rewind addresses, see brrestore - Log File Retrieval Tool [Page 163].

tape_address_rew Standard address of the default tape device. Using this address results in the tape being rewound at the end of each tape operation.

expir_period Number of weeks that must pass before a used tape can be re-used without the need to explicitly reinitialize it. The default is value 6.

tape_use_count Number of times a tape can be re-initialized before warning messages appear requesting that the tape be replaced. The default value is 100. Do not use operating system tools to modify tapes or this information will be lost resulting in tapes being used too often, risking loss of data.

dd_flags Flags used to modify the dd command when archiving files to tape. These may need modifying if a non-standard block size is used.

dd_in_flags Flags used to modify the dd command when restoring files from tape. These may need modifying if a non-standard block size is used.

delete_protocols Number of days to retain tool protocol entries in the Admin DB, before they are deleted. The default value is 30.

adsm_mc Name of the default TSM management class.

5. To cancel changes, choose Escape. To confirm the changes, choose Enter.

A dialog box appears asking for confirmation of the changes.

6. To confirm the changes, choose Yes.

Page 73: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 73

4.1.2 Configuring the Admin Tools Using Environment Files The environment files init<DBSID>.db6 and init<SAPSID>.db6 are the primary source for configuring the Admin Tools. The redirected restore tool brdb6brt and the CCMS tools (for example, dmdb6rdi, dmdb6rts, dmdb6srp, dmdb6snp and db6clp) can be configured in the init<SAPSID>.db6 file. The Admin Tools (for example, db2uext2, brarchive, brrestore, db6adutl, sddb6mir) can be configured in the init<DBSID>.db6 file.

Location of the Environment Files • The init<DBSID>.db6 file is located in the following directory:

For SAP system releases lower and including 4.6D

UNIX: /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/global

Windows: <drive>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\SYS\global

For SAP Web AS 6.10 or higher

UNIX: <INSTHOME>/admintools

Windows: <INSTHOME>\admintools

Be aware that for SAP system releases lower and including 4.6D, <SAPSID> equals <DBSID> and the global directory is used as the location for the environment files. Thus, all the variables are contained in the same file that is located in the global directory.

• The init<SAPSID>.db6 file is located in the following directory:

UNIX: /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/global

Windows: <drive>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\SYS\global

Format of File Content The following is a brief description of the format of the file content:

• A # introduces comments; the rest of the line is ignored.

• Empty lines are ignored.

• To set a variable, you have to specify a line like <variable name> = <value>, for example, DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR = c:\temp.

Activation of Variables All recognized variables are listed in the file and are inactive as long as they appear after the comment sign (#). You activate a variable by removing the comment sign (#) and by adapting the value of the variable according to your requirements.

We strongly recommend that you use only these files for configuring the Admin Tools-specific environment variables.

Page 74: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

74 July 2006

Admin Tools Configuration Variables The following table lists the configuration variables of the Admin Tools, which are listed in file init<DBSID>.db6 or init<SAPSID>.db6 respectively, and their values.

Variable Value

INSTHOME

(4.6D Admin Tools only)

UNIX:

Points to the db2<dbsid> home directory.

Windows:

Points to <CD-drive>:\db2\db<dbsid>.

DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH Points to the archive directory.

UNIX: /db2/<DBSID>/log_archive (default value)

Windows: Default value for a single-partitioned database: <drive>:\db2<DBSID>\log_archive Default value for a multi-partitioned database: \\<instance_owning_machine>\log_archive<DBSID>

DB2DB6_RETRIEVE_PATH Points to the retrieve directory.

UNIX: /db2/<DBSID>/log_retrieve (default value)

Windows: Default value for a single-partitioned database: <drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\log_retrieve Default value for a multi-partitioned system: \\<instance_owning_machine>\log_retrieve<DBSID>

DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR UNIX: /tmp (default value)

Windows: Value of %TEMP% (default value)

DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR This variable is not set by default.

If this variable is used, the User Exit creates an additional copy of the log file in the standby directory during the archiving operation. If you want to set up a hot-standby system, you can use this variable For more information, see The db2inidb Tool [Page 132].

DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR_NOERR By default, this variable is not set or set to OFF.

If the variable is set to ON, operations that fail in the standby directory do not cause the executable, which accesses the standby directory, to abort with an error.

DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR_ADMDBSAR By default, this variable is not set or set to OFF.

If the variable is set to ON, brarchive creates an additional copy of the Admin DB backup SAR file in standby directory DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR.

Page 75: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 75

DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT • For indirect archiving: This variable is not set or set to OFF.

• For TSM: To activate archiving to TSM, set variable as follows: DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT=TSM:<mgmt class1>[+<mgmt class 2>]

• For direct archiving to an alternative storage product, set the variable as follows: DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT=VENDOR. In addition, to activate direct archiving to an alternative storage product, you must configure variable DB2DB6_VENDOR_UEXIT.

• For archiving directly to disk, set the variable as follows: DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT=DISK.

For more information, see Configuring the System for Archiving Log Files [Page 78].

DB2DB6_VENDOR_UEXIT By default, this variable is not set.

If you have configured DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT=VENDOR, you need to set the variable as follows: DB2DB6_VENDOR_UEXIT=<path to vendor User Exit>.

For more information, see Archiving to an Alternative Storage Management Product [Page 82].

DB2DB6_UEXIT_ARCHIVE_WO_DB By default, this variable is not set or set to ON.

If this variable is set to ON, the User Exit does not update the Admin DB during indirect archiving operations. brarchive updates the Admin DB only during the next archiving operation. For SAP system releases lower and including 4.6D where program sddb6mir is used, sddb6mir updates the Admin DB as well.

DB2DB6_UEXIT_RETRIEVE_WO_DB By default, this variable is not set or set to OFF.

If this variable is set to ON, the User Exit tries to retrieve log files from log_archive or log_retrieve even if the Admin DB does not exist or is not up-to-date.

DB2DB6_CORE By default, this variable is not set or set to OFF.

If this variable is set to ON, the Admin Tools executables write a core file in UNIX instead of trying to handle exceptions internally. We strongly recommend that you do not set this variable to ON unless you are asked to do so by SAP support.

DB2DB6_NO_EJECT By default, this variable is not set or set to OFF which generally avoids ejection of the tape To eject the tape, which is the default behaviour, set this variable to ON.

DB2DB6_TSM_TIMEOUT Disconnects DB2 from TSM after a specified time in seconds of no response . By default, this variable is not set. To switch off this function, set this parameter to zero.

Page 76: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

76 July 2006

DB2DB6_LIBDB6SC_SCRIPT By default, this variable is not set.

If you want to archive log files using a customer script with brarchive, the value of the variable must be set to the fully qualified path of the customer script.

For more information, see Indirect Archiving Using a Customer Script [Page 89].

DB2DB6_TSM_MULTITHREADED By default, this variable is not set or set to OFF.

If you want to use the TSM LANFREE feature, you must set this variable to ON.

For more information, see Configuring TSM (Tivoli Storage Management) [Page 90].

DB2DB6_TSM_SLIB By default, this variable is not set or set to OFF.

You only have to set this variable if the currently shown shared library version changes in newer versions of TSM. We strongly recommend that you do not set this variable to ON unless you are asked to do so by SAP Support.

DB2DB6_ADMDB_REORG_FREQUENCY By default, this variable is not set. The default value of seven days applies.

By setting this variable, you can specify how often the Admin DB is reorganized :

• –1 = never

• 7 = default value

DB2DB6_TRC_<TOOL> By default, this variable is not set or set to OFF.

If you set this variable to ON, the tracing for <TOOL> is activated.

DB2DB6_TRC_<TOOL>_LEVEL Values between 1 and 9 are allowed and specify the level of detail:

• 1 = less detailed

• 3 = default

• 9 = maximum

DB2DB6_TRC_<TOOL>_PATH Specifies the path where the trace files of format <TOOL>.<timestamp>.trc are created.

DB2DB6_TRC_<TOOL>_FILE Overrides DB2DB6_TRC_<TOOL>_PATH.

If this variable is used, the same trace is used for all runs of <TOOL>, which is set to the fully qualified path of the trace file.

Page 77: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 77

Configuration Variables of Other Tools The following table lists the configuration variables of the redirected restore tool brdb6brt and the CCMS tools, which are contained in file init<SAPSID>.db6, and their values.

Variable Default Value

Description

DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_RETRIES 10 Backup retries in case of offline backups.

DB2DB6_DMDB6BkP_TAPE_PATTERN

(Windows only)

\\ Pattern which distinguishes tapes from normal directories

DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_BLOCK_SIZE 1024 Sets backup block size for tapes (used by tool dmdb6bkp)

DB2DB6_DBDM6SRP_UPDATE_THRESHOLD 15 Updates threshold in percent to flag tables for RUNSTATS.

DB2DB6_DMDB6SRP_TABLESIZE_THRESHOLD 1000 Specifies minimum table size in rows to flag tables for RUNSTATS.

DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_UTIL_IMPACT_PRIORITY 0 Specifies impact priority for backup. 0 means no throttling.

DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_COMPRESS OFF Sets compression flag for backup

DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_INCLUDE_LOGS OFF Includes required transaction log files in an online backup to recover the database to any consistent point in time.

Page 78: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

78 July 2006

DB2DB6_DB2DB6_BLOCK_SIZE 1024 Specifies backup block size for tapes (used by tool db2db6)

DB2DB6_DB6SRPRTS_PCT_LONG_LOB 10 Percentage of rows that are read for table size calculation for long and lob columns.

DB2DB6_DMDB6RDI_REFRESH_LOG_INFO 14 Number of days to refresh CCMS archiving log information

See also:

Appendix D: Example of File init<DBSID>.db6 [Page 212].

4.2 Configuring the System for Archiving Log Files As outlined in Basic Concepts [Page 23], log files can be archived directly or indirectly.

Direct Archiving The User Exit archives log files either directly to disk (DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH), to TSM or to another vendor storage management product, that is log files are immediately copied from the system to a safe backend and do no longer reside on the local system. The User Exit program can be configured to support one of these options.

Archiving log files directly to a storage vendor product means that the User Exit program uses the indicated storage management product to manage DB2 log files. In case of TSM the User Exit utilizes the TSM APIs to archive and retrieve log files. All other storage products (for example, Legato Networker from Legato System, Inc.) deliver their own implementation of the User Exit program.

Page 79: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 79

Direct archiving offers the following advantages:

• System configuration is less complex as no Admin DB or DB2 Control Center Extensions are required.

• Backups can also be archived with the storage management product.

• Tape access and management using storage management systems are easy to handle and no tape space is wasted.

• No extra space for an archive directory is needed when archiving to TSM or any other storage management product. You only need extra space if you archive directly to disk.

We recommend that database administrators use direct archiving as it performs well and requires minimal maintenance. ROLLFORWARD operations after a database restore normally require no user interaction when using direct archiving.

However, when using direct archiving you have to take into considerations that some constraints apply. During a roll-forward recovery of the database the storage management system must be available. If it is not available, problems will arise. You can avoid this situation by setting variable DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR to keep local copies of log files until they are no longer required on the local system. Furthermore, an overflow of the log_directory can occur due to network outage or unavailability of the storage management system.

You can avoid an overflow of the log directory by increasing the space of the log directory using the space you saved by not needing an archive directory. In addition, setting DB2 registry variable DB2_BLOCK_ON_LOG_DISK_FULL=ON (DB2 Version 7.2) or the corresponding database configuration variable parameter BLK_LOG_DSK_FULL=YES (DB2 Version 8) also reduces the risk of database failure. You also may consider to use infinite logging.

Indirect Archiving This is the default configuration. The User Exit automatically copies log files to the directory specified in the DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH variable. Then brarchive is used to archive the copied files. In this case, you can archive log files to TSM, tape or using a customer script.

Indirect archiving offers the following advantages:

• Log files are stored on the local system until deleted by brarchive.

In case your storage management system is unavailable, you are still able to restore and rollforward the database as long as all log files and backups are still available on the local system.

• Simple tape support is provided by the Admin Tools.

• Option brrestore –delete allows deletion of log files that were created before a specific timestamp. With direct archiving this function is not available.

• The time of the archiving operation can freely be chosen. Thus, network traffic can be avoided during the day by archiving during the night.

Page 80: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

80 July 2006

However, when using indirect archiving, you have to take into consideration that there are a few disadvantages. For example, log files located in the archive directory are unsafe until stored to a safe backend by brarchive. The complexity of the solution, including additional storage directories and an extra Admin DB, slightly increases the risk of failure. Especially the existence of the Admin DB can cause problems in split-mirror scenarios and when performing a homogeneous system copy.

See also:

For detailed information about direct and indirect archiving, see the following sections:

• Archiving Directly to TSM [Page 80]

• Archiving Directly to Disk [Page 81]

• Archiving to an Alternative Storage Management Product [Page 82]

• Indirect Archiving to Tape [Page 82]

• Indirect Archiving to TSM [Page 88]

• Indirect Archiving Using a Customer Script [Page 89]

4.2.1 Archiving Directly to TSM In order to use the Tivoli Storage Manager to manage DB2 log files and/or DB2 backups, the TSM client software must be installed on the DB2 database server and a TSM server must be available. For more information about how to set up the TSM client, see Configuring TSM (Tivoli Storage Management) [Page 90].

To indicate direct archiving to TSM, set the DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT variable in the environment file init<DBSID>.db6 (make sure that it is not commented out).

The following syntax is used to set variable DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT:

DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT = TSM:[<Mgmt Class>]

To use the TSM management class MLOG1:

DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT = TSM:MLOG1

If you do not want to create and use a specific TSM management class, specify either of the following:

• DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT = TSM

• DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT = TSM:DEFAULT

After you have switched on direct archiving by setting variable DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT, the Admin DB ADM<DBSID> is no longer used and can be dropped.

Page 81: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 81

The following naming conventions on the TSM server apply:

TSM Variable Meaning /<DBSID> TSM file space name

DB2 TSM file space type

/NODEyyyy High level file identifier, where yyyy is the node number

/Szzzzzzz.LOG Low level file name, where zzzzzzz is the log file number

For the database BIN on node NODE0000, archiving log file S0000599.LOG would result in the following values:

• File space name: /BIN

• File space type: DB2

• Object name file space: /BIN

• Object high-level name: /NODE0000

• Object low-level name: /S0000599.LOG

For storing the log files, the archive copy group is used by default. If no archive copy group is defined, a backup copy group is used. We recommend that you define an archive copy group.

Archiving to Two TSM Management Classes For duplicated archiving of log files to TSM, you have to create two management classes in TSM. To do so, you specify both management classes, for example, MC1 and MC2, in the User Exit variable DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT.

DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT = TSM:MC1+MC2

Archiving Using TSM Option LANFREE To make sure that the Admin Tools work in a TSM LANFREE environment, you have to activate variable DB2DB6_TSM_MULTITHREADED in file init<DBSID>.db6.

4.2.2 Archiving Directly to Disk Since Admin Tools patch 23 (6.NN Admin Tools) or patch 12 (4.6D Admin Tools), the User exit can directly archive or retrieve log files to or from disk. To define the archive directory, you have to configure environment variable DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH.

Set the DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT and DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH variables in the environment file init<DBSID>.db6 using the following syntax:

DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT = DISK

DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH = <log file archive path>

During the archiving operation the User Exit appends the partition number to the log file to avoid that log files from other DB2 partitions will be overwritten. During the retrieve operation

Page 82: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

82 July 2006

the log file is transferred back to the log directory and the partition number is removed automatically.

The log files in the archive directory need to be manually archived to disk using tools of your choice.

Be aware that you cannot use brarchive or brrestore to archive or restore these log files.

4.2.3 Archiving to an Alternative Storage Management Product In order to choose an alternative storage manager product to manage DB2 log files or DB2 backups, the specific client software must be installed and configured on the DB2 database server. The Admin Tools User Exit must also be installed.

Make sure that the vendor User Exit program is renamed and does not overwrite the User Exit program delivered by SAP.

Set the DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT and DB2DB6_VENDOR_UEXIT variables in the environment file init<DBSID>.db6 using the following syntax:

DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT = VENDOR

DB2DB6_VENDOR_UEXIT = <vendor user exit program name>

If the vendor User Exit program is not in the path of the DB2 instance owner db2<dbsid>, specify the program with the fully qualified path.

For setup and error handling relating to the vendor User Exit program, refer to the vendor’s documentation.

4.2.4 Indirect Archiving to Tape You can only archive log files to tape in indirect archiving mode. For this purpose, the Admin Tools include a tape management facility. All tapes and tape devices used for log file archiving must be registered here. Each tape and tape device is assigned to a tape device class.

The basic steps in tape management include:

• Defining device classes.

• Defining devices.

• Initializing (naming) tapes.

Page 83: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 83

Initially, a default device class is defined. This device class initially contains one defined device:

Windows: /dev/mt0

AIX: /dev/rmt0

Solaris: /dev/rmt/0

Linux: /dev/st0

HP-UX: /dev/rmt/0m

We recommend that you update or replace default entries according to your requirements. To define device classes, devices and tapes, read the following sections.

If you have more than one tape device, replace the 0 with 1, 2 and so on to address them. For example, the second tape on Solaris is /dev/rmt/1.

Working with Tape Device Classes ...

1. In the navigation frame of the DB2 Control Center, expand the <system name> node until the database names are visible.

2. From the context menu of the SAP database <DBSID> icon, choose SAP Tape Management.

3. If required, log on as user db2<dbsid>.

The Tape Management dialog box appears.

4. Choose Tapes.

5. To display a list of all known device classes, expand the <System name> node in the tree.

Page 84: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

84 July 2006

6. You can choose from the following actions:

To add a new device class, choose Add Device Class from the context menu of the <system name> node.

To change an existing device class definition, choose Edit from the context menu of the <device class> node.

To remove a device class definition, choose Delete from the context menu of the <device class> node.

All devices and tapes of that class will also be removed by the delete action.

For the first two actions, the Add/Change Device Class dialog box appears.

7. Enter or change the fields as required. The fields are described in detail in the table

following this procedure.

8. Choose Add or Change depending whether you want to add a new device class or change existing data.

The fields in the Add/Change Device Class dialog box describe a tape device class. Most fields have a corresponding configuration parameter as described in the table under Parameters Affecting Log File Management Storage [Page 70].

Page 85: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 85

Field Description

Name Name of the device class. Required but can be freely chosen.

Capacity Overrides the tape_size configuration parameter.

Type Describes the device type you can choose from the menu.

Description Optional field that describes the device class.

Rewind Overrides the rewind configuration parameter.

Rewind Offline Overrides the rewind_offline configuration parameter.

Eject Identical to Rewind offline. Set this field to the same value.

Positioning Overrides the tape_pos_cmd configuration parameter.

Working with Tape Devices ...

1. In the navigation frame of the DB2 Control Center, choose SAP Tape Management from the context menu of the SAP database <DBSID>.

2. If required, log on as user db2<dbsid>.

3. Expand the <system name> node, and the <device class> node to which the device definition will be added.

4. Expand the Devices node.

A list of known device classes is displayed.

5. You can choose from the following actions:

To add a new tape, choose Add Device… from the context menu of the <device class> node.

To change an existing Device definition, choose Edit from the context menu of the <device> node.

To retrieve the label of a tape currently located in a tape drive, choose Retrieve Tape Label from the context menu of the <device> node.

To remove a device definition, choose Delete from the context menu of the <device> node.

For the first two actions the Add/Change Device dialog box appears.

Page 86: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

86 July 2006

6. Enter or change the fields as required. Description is optional.

7. Choose Add or Change depending on whether you want to add a new tape or change existing data.

Modifying the Tape Block Size To improve performance, it is sometimes necessary to modify the block size used to read and write tapes. The flags supplied to cpio and dd will need modifying if a non-standard block size is used. For cpio, the option ‘B‘ must be replaced with ‘C‘ followed by the block size divided by 512. For dd, the bs value must be changed to the block size in bytes.

Due to a limitation in the Admin DB design, such changes apply to all tape classes and tape devices.

Initializing Tapes Tapes must be initialized before files can be archived to them. This involves writing a header file to each tape, containing information such as volume name, SAP system ID and tape usage count. Only a single archive operation involving one or more log files is permitted on an initialized tape. Tapes must normally then be re-initialized before new log files can be archived to them. As described in Changing the Admin Tools Configuration [Page 70], tapes can be re-used if the log files go out of date as defined by the expir_period configuration parameter.

Initializing Tapes Using the DB2 Control Center ...

1. In the navigation frame of the DB2 Control Center, choose SAP Tape Management from the context menu of the SAP database <DBSID>.

2. If required, log on as user db2<dbsid>.

3. Expand the <system name> node, and the <device class> node to which the tape to be initialized belongs.

The Tape Management dialog box appears.

Page 87: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 87

4. From the context menu of the Tapes node, choose Initialize Tape….

The Initialize Tape dialog box appears

5. Enter the name of the new tape.

6. Choose the device where the tape is located.

If the tape has never been initialized before or was used to archive files less than expir_period weeks ago, the initialization is not permitted unless the Force initialization box is selected. You can change the value of the expir_period parameter in the SAP Option Management dialog box.

To initialize a tape the first time, the Force initialization option must be selected.

7. To initialize the tape, choose Init.

All tape actions and their results can be seen by choosing Journal tab.

To initialize an already registered tape again, choose Re-initialize ….from the context menu of the tape icon.

To remove a tape, choose Delete from the context menu of the tape icon.

Initializing Tapes with brarchive

brarchive is the command that the DB2 Control Center uses to initialize tapes. Calling brarchive on the command line gives the administrator access to all command line options and may therefore be more flexible than the DB2 Control Center interface.

The following command initializes a tape with the name D4XA01 without checking whether the tape has already been used or initialized. Messages are only written to a protocol file. To initialize the tape, enter the following command: brarchive -i force -v D4XA01 –t/dev/rmt/0

The complete syntax is explained in Appendix A: Tool Command Line Parameters [Page 157].

Page 88: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

88 July 2006

4.2.5 Indirect Archiving to TSM For indirect archiving to TSM, no special tasks must be performed other than configuring TSM itself. You can find more general information about TSM configuration in Configuring TSM (Tivoli Storage Management) [Page 90].

The following naming conventions apply on the TSM server:

TSM Variable Description /<DBSID> TSM file space name

DB2 TSM file space type

/NODEyyyy High level file identifier, where yyyy is the node number

/Szzzzzzz.LOG.YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.NODEyyyy Low level file name, where

• zzzzzzz is the log file number

• YYYYMMDDHHMMSS is the file that was closed by DB2

• yyyy is the node number

For the database BIN on node NODE0000, archiving the log file S0000599.LOG would result in the following values:

• File space name: /BIN

• File space type: DB2

• High-level name: /NODE0000

• Low-level name: /S0000599.LOG.20010606103645.NODE0000

For storing the log files the archive copy group is used by default if no archive copy group is defined. Then a backup copy group is used.

We recommend that you define an archive copy group.

Archiving Using the TSM Option LANFREE If you want to use this option, you have to activate variable DB2DB6_TSM_MULTITHREADED in file init<DBSID>.db6 to enable the Admin Tools to work in a TSM-LANFREE environment.

Page 89: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 89

4.2.6 Indirect Archiving Using a Customer Script brarchive und brrestore currently only support archiving to two backends: TSM and tape. By using your own script, you enable the Admin Tools to archive log files to any backend, which means any other storage product or storage device, according to your requirements.

The script needs to be able to archive, retrieve or delete log files.

What Does the Script Need to Support? If you want to use your own script to archive log files to any other back-end than TSM or tape, you have to make sure the script accepts the parameters and return codes provided by brarchive and brrestore.

The following table lists the parameters that the script needs to support:

Parameter Description

action You can set the parameter to perform the following actions:

• ARCHIVE

• RETRIEVE

• DELETE

directory • If you are archiving log files, directory points to the directory where the log files to be archived are located.

• If you are retrieving log files, directory points to the directory where the log files should be retrieved to.

• If you are deleting log files, directory points to the directory where the log files were originally archived from.

file Defines the log file that is to be used. The log file has the following format: Snnnnnnn.LOG<TS>.NODExxxx

The sequence of the parameters in the script must be the same as in the table.

...

The following table lists the return codes the script must issue for every action performed so that brarchive and brrestore can determine a success or failure:

Return Code Description

LFMVND_STATUS_OK=0 Indicates success of the action performed.

LFMVND_RC_ERROR=64 Indicates failure of the action performed.

LFMVND_COMMAND_NOT_SUPPORTED=71 Indicates that the action specified in the script is not supported.

You must make sure that you specify the correct return codes for every action performed − as described in the table.

For example, if the script returns LFM_STATUS_OK (although the action has failed) brarchive and brrestore assume that the action was completed successfully, which is not the case. Thus, the content of the Admin DB becomes inconsistent and you risk to lose log files.

Page 90: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

90 July 2006

Writing Your Own Script You use the sample script db6sctsm.smp, which is part of the Admin Tools delivery, to write your own script. The shell script is designed for UNIX. If your system is running on Windows, you have to write a batch file or an executable. In the sample script the TSM client dsmc is used to archive, retrieve or delete log files.

We strongly recommend that you copy the sample script to avoid overwriting during the next Admin Tool installation. After having copied the script, you can enter your archive, retrieve or delete commands.

Activating the Script You activate the script by setting parameter DB2DB6_LIBDB6SC_SCRIPT=<path to customer script> in file init<DBSID>.db6.

For more information about how to set parameters in file init<DBSID>db6, see Configuring the Admin Tools Using Environment Files [Page 73].

4.3 Configuring TSM (Tivoli Storage Management) Use When issuing DB2 BACKUP or RESTORE commands, you can specify Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM product, to manage the database or tablespace backup). You can also use TSM to manage archived DB2 log files.

We recommend that you use at least TSM Version 4.1.

Procedure Before the DB2 Database Manager db2<dbsid> can use TSM, you have to perform the following steps: ...

1. Install the TSM client and API on the DB2 server.

2. Configure the TSM files dsm.opt (UNIX and Windows) and dsm.sys (UNIX only) as described in Configuring TSM Files dsm.opt and dsm.sys [Page 91].

3. Configure the TSM environment variables DSM_DIR, DSMI_DIR, DSM_CONFIG, DSMI_CONFIG, DSM_LOG and DSMI_LOG as described in Configuring TSM Environment Variables [Page 92].

4. To generate the password, run the TSM client dsmc once.

5. To make the environment variable visible to DB2, restart DB2 with db2start.

For more detailed information about steps 2 and 3, see SAP Note 82029 ADSM/TSM Installation in DB2 Environment.

Page 91: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 91

4.3.1 Configuring TSM Files dsm.opt and dsm.sys On UNIX systems, the TSM files dsm.opt and dsm.sys must be configured. On Windows systems, the TSM file dsm.opt must be configured. The files must contain the following parameters:

UNIX

File dsm.opt

Parameter Value SERVERNAME <TSM server name>

File dsm.sys

Parameter Value SERVERNAME <TSM server name>

COMMETHOD TCP/IP

TCPPORT 1500

TCPSERVERADDRESS <TSM server IP address or host name and domain name>

PASSWORDACCESS Generate

PASSWORDDIR /etc/adsm

The entry of SERVERNAME in the dsm.opt file must fit the value SERVERNAME in the dsm.sys file.

For parameter PASSWORDDIR:

The users root and db2<dbsid> must be able to access directory /etc/adsm. Make sure that this directory has the appropriate authorizations.

Windows

File dsm.opt

Parameter Value COMMMETHOD TCP/IP

TCPPORT 1500

NODENAME <TSM client>

TCPSERVERADDRESS <TSM server IP address or host name and domain name>

PASSWORDACCESS Generate

Page 92: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

92 July 2006

4.3.2 Configuring TSM Environment Variables TSM environment variables DSM_DIR, DSMI_DIR, DSM_CONFIG, DSMI_CONFIG, DSM_LOG and DSMI_LOG are needed to tell TSM where TSM resides and on which TSM server the database backup and the log files should be stored.

The following list provides additional information about these variables that you have to take into consideration depending on the Admin Tools version you are using:

• 4.6D Admin Tools

UNIX

During the installation of the SAP system with R3SETUP the files .dbenv_<hostname>.csh and .dbenv_<hostname>.sh are created in the home directory of db2<dbsid> and <sapsid>adm. These files contain some default values for the TSM variables, which are not valid in most cases and which must be corrected.

Windows

The above mentioned variables are not set during installation and must be added manually to the user environment of db2<dbsid> and <sapsid>adm.

• 6.NN Admin Tools or higher

UNIX

The sddb6ins program, which installs the Admin Tools, adds an entry to the profile, .cshrc and .login scripts in the home directories of db2<dbsid> and <sapsid>adm, which call the dbaenv_<hostname>.csh and dbaenv_<hostname>.sh script.

The shell script dbaenv_<hostname>.csh and dbaenv_<hostname>. sh add the TSM API-specific environment variables DSMI_DIR, DSMI_CONFIG and DSMI_LOG, as well as the TSM client-specific environment variables DSM_DIR, DSM_CONFIG and DSM_LOG. The values, which are set there, work on all standard TSM installations and generally do need not to be corrected.

Windows

If the TSM software is installed on the database server before the sddb6ins program is called, sddb6ins detects this and sets the TSM API-specific environment variables DSMI_DIR, DSMI_CONFIG and DSMI_LOG to appropriate values in the user environment of users db2<dbsid> and <sapsid>adm.

If you install the TSM software afterwards, you can rerun sddb6ins with the –i option and sddb6ins will add these variables.

Page 93: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 93

Environment Variables for TSM: The following table provides an overview of all environment variables you should check:

Variable Value Set In

DSMI_DIR Location of TSM API library with the following default:

Windows: <drive>:\progra~1\Tivoli\ tsm\api

UNIX:

For 6.NN Admin Tools:

• dbaenv_<hostname>.csh

• dbaenv_<hostname>.sh

For 4.6D Admin Tools:

• ~/.dbenv_<hostname>.csh

• ~/.dbenv_<hostname>.sh

Windows:

User environment of db2<dbsid> and <sapsid>adm

UNIX:

For 6.NN Admin Tools:

• $INSTHOME/admintools/bin/dbaenv_<hostname>.csh

• dbaenv_<hostname>.sh

For 4.6D Admin Tools:

• ~/.dbenv_<hostname>.csh

• ~/.dbenv_<hostname>.sh

DSMI_LOG Log directory for TSM API with the following default:

Windows: <drive>:\progra~1\Tivoli \tsm\api

UNIX: $INSTHOME/errors

Same as for variable DSMI_DIR as described in this table.

DSMI_CONFIG Location of dsm.opt file with the following default:

Windows: <drive>:\progra~1\Tivoli \tsm\baclient\dsm.opt

UNIX: $INSTHOME/sqllib/adsm /dsm.opt

Same as relevant location for variable DSMI_DIR as described in this table

UNIX only: DSM_DIR

Location of TSM client with the following default:

For 6.NN Admin Tools:

• dbaenv_<hostname>.csh

• dbaenv_<hostname>.sh

For 4.6D Admin Tools:

• ~/.dbenv_<hostname>.csh

• ~/.dbenv_<hostname>.sh

UNIX only:

For 6.NN Admin Tools:

• $INSTHOME/admintools/bin/dbaenv_<hostname>.csh

• $INSTHOME/admintools/bin

For 4.6D Admin Tools:

• ~/.dbenv_<hostname>.csh

• ~/.dbenv_<hostname>.sh

Page 94: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

94 July 2006

UNIX only: DSM_LOG

Log directory for TSM client.

The default is $INSTHOME/errors

UNIX only:

Same as for variable DSM_DIR as described in this table

UNIX only: DSM_CONFIG

Location of dsm.opt file for TSM client. The default is:

$INSTHOME/sqllib/adsm/ dsm.opt

UNIX only:

Same as for variable DSM_DIR as described in this table

4.3.3 Configuration Considerations With TSM, you can use the same or different management classes for archiving backups and log files. The preferable solution, however, is that you use a management class for backups different from the one you use for log files. If you use the same management class, backups and log files might be archived to the same tape. In this case, the following disadvantages have to be taken into consideration:

• If you lose a tape, you not only lose a backup but also the log files. If you only lose a backup, you can use an older backup and still perform a rollforward recovery. With log files missing, this is not possible.

• The performance during rollforward recovery is limited because log files are widely spread on the tape if stored on the same tape as backups.

• Sometimes you might be forced to keep offline backups longer than log files. If log files are deleted from tape by TSM, you cannot reuse the whole tape because backups still reside on that tape and space reclamation drastically affects the system performance.

We recommend that for archiving log files you use a disk storage pool. With this pool, you can achieve a better system and rollforward performance if caching on the disk storage pool is switched on.

For backups, however, we recommend that you do not use such a disk storage pool. If the DB2 backup image does not fit into this disk storage pool, TSM will fail. An extremely large disk storage pool would be necessary to avoid this problem.

Page 95: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 95

4.4 DB2 Configuration Parameters DB2 variables are configured by the SAP installation to ensure that DB2 and the Admin Tools work. This section lists parameters, which influence the Admin Tools directly, with a brief description. If it is necessary to change them, refer to the DB2 documentation.

<DBSID> Database Configuration

Database Configuration Parameter

Description

LOGRETAIN Must be set to ON that roll-forward recovery is possible.

USEREXIT Must be set to ON that the User Exit db2uext2 is called.

LOGPATH Directory where DB2 writes log files to.

LOGFILSIZ Defines the size of each log file. Default value in an SAP environment is 64 MB.

Database Manager Configuration

Database Manager Configuration Parameter

Description

DIAGPATH Location where DB2 writes the db2diag.log. The User Exit program db2uext2 writes the files db2uext2.NODEyyyy.log and db2uext2.NODEyyyy.err to this directory.

DB2 Instance Registry Variables

Instance Registry Variable Description DB2ENVLIST Default value:

• Windows: INSTHOME SAPSYSTEMNAME dbs_db6_schema

• AIX: LIBPATH INSTHOME SAPSYSTEMNAME dbs_db6_schema

• Linux: LD_LIBRARY_PATH INSTHOME SAPSYSTEMNAME dbs_db6_schema

• Solaris: LD_LIBRARY_PATH INSTHOME SAPSYSTEMNAME dbs_db6_schema

• HP-UX: SHLIB_PATH INSTHOME SAPSYSTEMNAME dbs_db6_schema

Setting these variables ensures that the User Exit program db2uext2 and the stored procedure sddb6jds get the appropriate environment. The sddb6ins installation program sets this value appropriately.

Page 96: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

96 July 2006

4.5 Disk Space Considerations for Running the Admin Tools The following section provides additional information about the directories that are needed if you want to install the Admin Tools. The given information refers to disk space considerations for:

• Log files

• Protocols

• Trace files

• Admin DB

Log Files • Direct archiving

Make sure that the log directory provides sufficient space to avoid problems if your storage management system might be temporarily unavailable.

• Indirect archiving

The free space in the directory where DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH is pointing to, needs to be dimensioned, depending on the log file size and the period of time between two brarchive calls and the amount of log files that accumulate between two brarchive calls.

The free space in the directory where DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR is pointing to needs to be dimensioned, so that two exports of the Admin DB fit into it. Otherwise, brarchive fails to store the Admin DB.

Protocols • User Exit protocols

The User Exit writes its protocol files db2uext2.NODExxxx.log and dbuext2.NODExxxx.err to the directory where the database manager configuration parameter DIAGPATH points to.

• brarchive/brrestore protocols

These log files are initially generated in the directory where DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR points to. They are moved to the protocols directory at the end of the brarchive/brrestore run.

The directories differ for the Admin Tools version as follows:

For 6.NN Admin Tools: <INSTHOME>/admintools/protocols

For 4.6D Admin Tools: brarchive: <INSTHOME>/saparch

brrestore: <INSTHOME>/saprest

These directories need to be dimensioned to hold the small protocol files.

Page 97: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 97

Trace Files Trace files are only generated if the user has explicitly enabled trace file generation in the init<DBSID>.db6 file. The trace files are only required to determine defects or by the SAP support to fix problems.

The trace file directory can be configured in the init<DBSID>.db6 file for each executable separately. The default directories are:

• For 6.NN Admin Tools: <INSTHOME>/admintools/TraceFiles

• For 4.6D Admin Tools: <DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR>/TraceFiles

Admin DB (Indirect Archiving) The Admin DB is relatively small and its size increases slowly. All methods to keep the Admin DB small are described in Regular Administration [Page 98].

Page 98: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

98 July 2006

5 Regular Administration

5.1 DB2 Log File Management The concepts and terminology used in this chapter are described in Basic Concepts [Page 23]. For more detailed information about how to configure the log file management tools, see Configuration [Page 70].

If you are archiving directly, all archive processes will run automatically. You may need to delete old log files from the storage product occasionally.

For indirect archiving (the default), the main daily action is archiving log files to tape or TSM after they have been processed by the User Exit. If files are not deleted from the disk during these archive operations, the files remaining on the disk will also need deleting regularly. The other less regular log file management action is deleting log files from the storage product.

5.1.1 Archiving Log Files from Disk to Backend The log files are copied to a temporary disk location by the User Exit, as specified by the environment variable DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH.

Log file management information is stored in the Admin DB ADM<DBSID>. The log files written to the DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH location can by archived using the brarchive tool, either to tape, TSM or any other backend using a customer script. You can start brarchive on the command line or using the DB2 Control Center Extensions, or using the DBA Planning Calendar (transaction DB13).

Archiving with DB2 Control Center ...

1. In the navigation frame of the DB2 Control Center, choose your system and log on as a user with administrator authorizations.

2. On the subnode Database, from the context menu of the database <DBSID>, choose SAP Log File Management.

3. If required, log on as user <sapsid>adm or db2<dbsid>.

The Log File Management dialog box appears.

4. Choose Archive.

5. In the Archive Log Files of Node field, choose the node from which log files should be archived.

6. In the Log Files to be Archived field, choose the log file up to which you want to archive. All older log files up to the one you have selected will be selected for archiving.

If you do not want the log files to be deleted from the archive directory after archiving, select Keep Log Files in File System. Select TSM, Tape or Script:

TSM:

In the TSM Management Class field, select a TSM management class.

Page 99: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 99

The possible entries for the management class are maintained using the SAP Option Management dialog box. The corresponding keyword is adsm_mc. Under Value, a list of management classes is specified, separated by commas.

For more information, see Changing the Admin Tools Configuration [Page 70].

Tape:

i. Select Name of First Tape.

The list of devices next to this box is then recalculated to only contain the matching devices for that tape.

ii. Select a device. Alternatively, you can start by choosing a device name and afterwards choose an appropriate tape.

If you want to save to two tapes simultaneously, follow the same procedure for the Name of the Second Tape and its device. If these fields do not contain any entries, log files are saved to a single tape.

Once you have selected an entry in one of the four boxes, the entries in the remaining boxes are limited to those entries that match the selection.

iii. To display the full list of possible entries, start the selection process again by choosing Reset Selection.

If the tape is not initialized or the device you want to use is not displayed (not defined), go to the SAP Tape Management by choosing Tape. For more information, see Indirect Archiving to Tape [Page 82].

After archiving log files to a tape, the same tape cannot be used to archive additional log files in a later operation until the number of weeks specified in the expir_period configuration parameter has elapsed or the tape is initialized again. For more information, see Parameters Affecting Log File Management Storage [Page 70].

7. To start the archive process, choose Archive.

A dialog box appears indicating that the archiving process was just started. After the archiving has finished, another dialog box appears indicating if it was successful.

You can see all archiving actions and their results in the Journal page.

Archiving with Command Line Tool brarchive brarchive is the command that the DB2 Control Center uses to archive log files. Calling brarchive from the command line gives the administrator access to all command line options and may therefore be more flexible than the DB2 Control Center interface. The following syntax describes the most common usage of brarchive.

Tapes must be initialized before brarchive can use them. For more information, see Indirect Archiving to Tape [Page 82].

Page 100: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

100 July 2006

Archiving Log Files to Single Tape

Command syntax

brarchive -sd -d tape -v D4XA01 –t /dev/rmt/0 -out -n 25

Description Archives 25 log files to the tape D4XA01, and deletes them from the file system if processing completes successfully. Messages are written to the standard output and a protocol file.

Archiving Log Files to Two Tapes (Double Store)

Command syntax

brarchive -ssd -d tape -v D4XA01 D4XA02 –t /dev/rmt/0 /dev/rmt/1 -out -n 10

Description Archives the same ten log files to both the tapes D4XA01 and D4XA02, and deletes them from the file system if processing completes successfully. Messages are written to the standard output file and a protocol file.

Archiving Log Files to TSM Without Delete

Command syntax

brarchive -s -d tsm –out

Description Archives all available log files to the default management class in TSM, without deleting them from the file system. Messages are written to the standard output file and a protocol file. You might not want to delete log files immediately to allow them to be processed using other tools. These must be deleted later using the –ds option.

Archiving Log Files to Two TSM Management Classes

Command syntax

brarchive –ssd –d tsm MC1+MC2 –out

Description As of 4.6D Admin Tool patch 20 or 6.NN Admin Tool patch 9, you can archive log files to two different management classes. You have to create two management classes, for example, MC1 and MC2, in TSM before you call brarchive.

For more information about the barchive syntax, see brarchive - Log File Archive Tool [Page 157].

Page 101: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 101

Setting Parameter Default Values in the Admin DB To avoid the necessity to specify all command line options, you can set some values in the SAP Option Management using the DB2 Control Center Extensions. For more information, see Parameters Affecting Log File Management Storage [Page 70].

Setting the values for the following configuration variables will help you to minimize the required command line options:

• backup_dev_type

Specify the value that you normally specify using the –d command line option.

• adsm_mc

Specify the TSM management class(es) that you want to use by default.

Archiving Using Customer Script To activate the script support, you have to set variable DB2DB6_LIBDB6SC_SCRIPT=<path_to_customer_script> in file init<DBSID>.db6. However, before you call brarchive and brrestore using the command line, you must make sure that option –d script is specified in the script as described in the following example.

• If you want to archive all log files, you enter the following command:

brarchive –s –d script –out

• If you want to retrieve up to ten log files, you enter the following command: brrestore –a –d script –n 10 –out

• If you want to delete log files for a specified backup timestamp, you enter the following command: brrestore –delete 20020107120000 –d script –out

For more information, see Appendix E: Example of Customer Script db6sctsm.smp [Page 221].

5.1.2 Deleting Log Files Log files may need to be deleted regularly depending on how often backups are taken, the number of log files generated each day, and the size of available storage. Log files are stored in the following locations:

• Log directory

• Archive directory

• Tape

• Storage Products

• Any other backend using a customer script

Page 102: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

102 July 2006

Deleting Log Files from the Log Directory

Normally there is no need to delete files from this directory. Do not delete files that are still needed by the database.

Log files will be deleted from the log directory if you:

• Drop a database.

This action deletes all log files in the current log path directory. You may need to back up these log files beforehand, for future recovery purposes.

• Recover the database to a point in time.

When recovering the database to a point in time, log files chronologically past the point in time are re-used and therefore lost. For example, if a roll-forward operation only needs log data up to the middle of log file 35 and you restart the database, the remainder of log file 35 and the whole of log files 36 and onwards will be re-used.

If you need to restore again past the point in time used earlier, you cannot do so since the log files were re-used. Retrieve the original set of log files manually to a different location and copy them back for the restore action. You can identify the original log files easily by their timestamp if they have the following format: Snnnnnnn.LOG.<timestamp>.NODExxxx.

To actively delete log files, use the PRUNE LOG FILE command. This DB2 command deletes all log files in the log directory created prior to a nominated log file. It will only do so from the active log path. If any log files have been moved to another path, they will not be considered by this command.

PRUNE LOGFILE PRIOR to S0000100.LOG

This command will delete all log files in the active log path up to and including S0000099.LOG.

Deleting Log Files from the Archive Directory Log files are placed here by the User Exit in indirect mode (default). If brarchive is then used with the –sd or –ssd archive actions, the log files are removed again when the files have been successfully stored. If only –s and –ss are used, the delete stored action (-ds) must be run separately to delete these files from the disk.

Deleting Log Files from Tape It is neither possible nor necessary to explicitly delete log files from tapes. As soon as a tape is re-initialized or re-used, the files previously stored on the tape are removed from the Admin DB.

Deleting Unknown TSM files with brrestore The log file management tool brrestore now allows removal of files from TSM that are not known to the Admin DB. This is done by specifying a file pattern, either to match log files (*.LOG and *.LOG.*), or Admin DB safety files (*.SAR).

The syntax is as follows: brrestore –delete <timestamp> [file pattern]

Page 103: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 103

Deleting Log Files from Storage Products You can delete log files from either:

• TSM

Only use the Admin Tools to work with files stored indirectly to TSM. To delete old log files created with recent tools, enter the following command:

brrestore –delete.

For more information about the syntax of brrestore, see brrestore - Log File Retrieval Tool [Page 163].

Files stored directly to TSM or archived indirectly with older tools (for example, for SAP system Release 3.1I and 4.0A) can be deleted using the db6adutl tool or the TSM utility dsmc. In this case, refer to Archiving Directly to TSM [Page 80] for a description of where the files are stored.

• Other storage management products

Files directly archived using an additional User Exit must be managed with tools made available by that product. For more information, see the corresponding product documentation.

Deleting Log Files Archived with a Customer Script You delete log files, which were archived using a customer script, by entering the following command:

brrestore –d script –delete.

The section DELETE must be implemented in the script.

For more information about the syntax of brrestore, see brrestore – Log File Retrieval Tool [Page 163].

5.2 Storage Management Approaching the limit of available storage can degrade overall performance. Running out of storage may cause the database or system to fail. Therefore, one essential task for system administrators is storage management, which consists of tasks such as:

• Checking the free space in file systems.

• Checking the space available in tablespaces.

• Checking the size of tables and indexes.

• Managing (for example, adding or resizing,) these storage elements to deal with changing requirements.

Page 104: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

104 July 2006

The tasks described in the following sections can be performed either using the DB2 Control Center or the DBA Cockpit.

The information provided for the DBA Cockpit is valid for SAP Web AS 6.10 or higher.

For SAP system Release 4.6x, you must make sure that you have installed the DBA Cockpit as described in SAP Note 300828.

5.2.1 Checking the Space Available in a File System To check the available free space of the log directory and the archive directory, proceed as follows:

From the SAP Performance Monitor You can access the information by calling transaction DB6COCKPIT and choosing Configuration → File Systems in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit. The information displayed on this screen helps you to determine how much free space is available in your file systems.

For more information, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

From the Operating System: Use the command df on UNIX systems and the program Explorer on Windows systems.

5.2.2 Checking the Space Available in a Tablespace To check the amount of space available in a DMS tablespace, proceed as follows:

From the SAP Performance Monitor

You can access information about space for tablespaces by calling transaction DB02 and choosing Space → Tablespaces in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit.

For more information, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

From the DB2 Control Center ...

1. Open the database tree.

2. Double-click onTablespaces.

In the contents pane a list of all tablespaces is displayed.

3. Scroll to columns Allocated size, Size used and Percentage used to see details related to the amount of space available in a tablespace. Space is measured in pages where one page is 4 KB.

Page 105: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 105

Adding More Space to a Tablespace The capacity for a DMS tablespace is the total size of all containers allocated to this tablespace. When a DMS tablespace reaches the threshold capacity (depending on the usage of the tablespace, 90% is a possible threshold), you should add more space to it.

If you are using the new features of DB2 Version 8.2.2, that is, DMS AutoResize or AutoStorage, you do not have to manually add space to containers.

From the SAP Performance Monitor (SAP Web AS 6.20 or higher)

You can add more space to tablespaces by calling transaction DB02 and choosing Space → Tablespaces in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit and choosing Add.

From DB2 CLP

Using the following SQL commands you can:

• Add a new container to a DMS tablespace.

The DB2 database manager will automatically rebalance the tables in the DMS tablespace across all available containers. During rebalancing, data in the tablespace remains accessible. To add a new container, enter the following SQL command: alter tablespace <tablespace name> add ( file '<container name>' <number of pages> )

• Increase the size of one or more containers in the DMS tablespace.

Extend one or more existing tablespace container by a specific size. To do so, enter the following SQL command: alter tablespace <tablespace name> extend (all containers <number additional pages> )

Resize one or more existing tablespace containers to a new size. Container sizes can only be increased. To do so, enter the following SQL command: alter tablespace <tablespace name> resize (all containers <new container size in pages> )

The database manager will automatically rebalance the tables in the DMS tablespace across all available containers if necessary. During rebalancing, data in the tablespace remains accessible.

• DB2 Version 8

Increase the size of a DMS tablespace by adding a new stripe set. To do so, enter the following SQL command: alter tablespace <tablespace name> begin new stripe set (file ‘<container name>’ <number of pages>)

This does not cause rebalancing. The space that you have added will be available immediately.

For more detailed information about the command syntax, see the IBM documentation DB2 Universal Database SQL Reference.

Page 106: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

106 July 2006

We recommend that you avoid rebalancing because it has an significant impact on the database performance. In addition, the added space is not available until rebalancing has finished.

Always resize all containers of the last stripe set, because no rebalancing occurs there. If this is not possible any more, for example, because the file system is full, begin a new stripe set with an appropriate number of containers.

If you are using the new features of DB2 Version 8.2.2, that is, DMS AutoResize or AutoStorage, database containers do not have to be resized because this is automatically done by DB2.

Reducing the Size of a Tablespace • DB2 Version 7

You can reduce the size of tablespaces by reorganizing all the tables in the tablespace, backing up the tablespace and restoring it using a new physical layout.

• DB2 Version 8

From the SAP Performance Monitor (SAP Web AS 6.20 or higher)

You can reduce the space of a tablespace by calling transaction DB02 and choosing Space → Tablespaces in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit and choosing Change.

From DB2 CLP

You can reduce the size of a tablespace using the following SQL command: alter tablespace <tablespace name> resize (all containers <new container size in pages>)

5.2.3 Checking the Size of Tables and Indexes You can access information about space for tables and indexes by calling transaction DB02 and choosing Space → Tables and Indexes in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit.

When you call this transaction for the first time, the following check on the system catalog tables is performed:

• Are there tables that do not yet have an entry in the CCMS control table DB6TREORG? (This table is always filled by CCMS programs after REORGCHK.)

• Are there tables that have entries in the CCMS control table DB6TREORG and that are not up-to-date with the system catalog?

If any tables are found, a dialog box appears listing these tables that require reorganization.

Be aware that running a REORGCHK on the listed tables may take a long time and affect the database performance.

To adjust the tables, choose REORGCHK. Otherwise, choose Continue.

For more information, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

Page 107: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 107

5.3 Performance Monitoring Performance monitoring consists of the following tasks:

• Monitoring database performance

• Monitoring SQL statements

• Updating statistics for database tables and checking for reorganization

• Monitoring jobs

You can access all monitoring and database administration tasks using the DBA Cockpit.

The DBA Cockpit is a navigation frame that holds a tree structure, which is divided at the top level into the main task areas of database administration, for example, performance monitoring.

The information provided for the DBA Cockpit is valid for SAP Web AS 6.10 or higher.

For SAP system releases lower than and including 4.6x, you must make sure that you have installed the DBA Cockpit as described in SAP Note 300828.

5.3.1 Monitoring Database Performance DB2 monitors are used to collect detailed resource usage information. The monitor switches can be turned on and off at the instance level (DBM configuration) or at the application level (using the UPDATE MONITOR SWITCHES command).

We recommend that you keep the monitor switches turned on. SAP provides a graphical performance monitor for DB2 to analyze the database activity basis of the DB2 monitor switches.

Checking Buffer Pool Quality Buffer pools are database objects used to cache database data pages in memory. If an object’s data page is placed in a buffer pool, physical I/O access to disks is avoided. Buffer pools can be assigned to cache only data of a particular tablespace. This is assigned within the tablespace definition. Every DB2 database must have a buffer pool. For each new database created, DB2 defines the IBMDEFAULTBP buffer pool. This is the default buffer pool for the database.

The information provided in this paragraph is only valid for SAP system Release 4.6C and higher.

You can access information about the buffer pool quality by calling transaction ST04 and choosing Performance → Database → Buffer Pools in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit.

Buffer pool related information is displayed. The values of Overall Buffer Quality, Data Hit Ratio and Index Hit Ratio should be more the 95 percent. Otherwise, contact SAP remote services Early Watch to improve the values.

Page 108: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

108 July 2006

For more information, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

Checking Locks and Deadlocks DB2 captures information for locks held by applications against a database and records each deadlock event (by means of deadlock event monitors).

The information provided in this paragraph is only valid for SAP system Release 4.6C and higher.

You can access information about lock escalation, deadlocks and lock timeouts by calling transaction ST04 and choosing Performance → Database → Buffer Pools in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit.

The value of Lock Escalations, Deadlocks Detected and Lock Timeouts should be almost zero. Otherwise, contact SAP remote services Early Watch to improve the values.

For more information, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

Checking Sort Overflows The DB2 Snapshot Monitor provides cumulative information about the number of heaps used, overflows and the performance of sorts. These snapshots are used in the SAP performance monitor to display sort overflows.

The information provided in this paragraph is only valid for SAP system Release 4.6C and higher.

You can access information about sort overflows by calling transaction ST04 and choosing Performance → Database → Sorts in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit.

The value of Sort Overflows divided by Total Sorts should result in less than 0,01. Otherwise, contact SAP remote services Early Watch to improve the values.

For more information, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

Checking Cache Quality You can access information about catalog cache and package cache by calling transaction ST04 and choosing Performance → Database → Cache in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit.

The values of Catalog Cache Quality and Package Cache Quality should be more the 95 percent. Otherwise, contact SAP remote services Early Watch to improve the values.

For more information, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

Page 109: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 109

5.3.2 Monitoring Dynamic SQL Statements Use The DB2 statement cache stores packages and statistics for frequently used SQL statements. By examining the contents of this cache, you can identify the dynamic SQL statements that are most frequently executed and the queries that consume the most resource. Using this information, you can examine the most commonly executed and most expensive SQL operations, to determine if SQL tuning could result in better database performance.

Procedure You can access information about the dynamic SQL cache by calling transaction ST04 and choosing Performance → SQL Cache in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit. You can retrieve the latest cached SQL statement by choosing Refresh.

If you retrieve data for the first time, a Selection Criteria dialog box appears where you can limit the result set displayed. Depending on your system, the snapshot can give you a wide range of information, which might lead to a very large result set.

If a snapshot already exists, that is, if you had already chosen Refresh at least once, you can display the last snapshot taken by choosing Set Selection Criteria.

For more information, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

Explain Function If a statement is displayed, choose Explain to list the access plan for the statement execution. The Explain function provides a detailed analysis of expensive SQL statements, for example, on how DB2 accesses the data to resolve the SQL statements.

To display the access plan of a statement from the SAP performance monitor: ...

1. Follow the procedure as described above.

2. Select a statement.

3. Choose Explain.

For more information, see the IBM documentation Administration Guide: Chapter 26, SQL Explain Facility.

5.3.3 Updating Statistics for Database Tables and Checking for Reorganization Regular updates of statistics on the physical characteristics of the database tables and indexes provide the necessary information for the DB2 optimizer to determine the access path to the data.

In a partitioned database system, statistics are collected based on the table data that is located on the database partition where the command is executed. Global table statistics for an entire partitioned table are derived by multiplying the values obtained at a database partition by the number of database partitions on the node group over which the table is partitioned. The global statistics information is stored in the catalog tables.

Page 110: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

110 July 2006

To update database tables’ statistics and to check whether tables need to be reorganized, you can use the jobs Update Statistics + Reorgchk all tables or Update Statistics and Reorgchk (DBSTATC) in the DBA Planning Calendar (transaction DB13). These jobs begin by updating the database statistics (using the DB2 RUNSTATS utility) and then check whether tables need to be reorganized (using the six formulas of the REORGCHK utility as described in the IBM documentation IBM DB2 Universal Database Command Reference).

The REORGCHK formulas help to decide if tables and indexes require physical reorganization.

These formulas are general recommendations that show the relationship between the allocated space and the space that is being used for the data in tables. Three formulas are used for tables, and three are used for indexes. The results are stored in SAP internal tables.

To reorganize tables we recommend that you use the jobs provided in the DBA Planning Calendar. These jobs automatically update the table and index statistics afterwards.

5.3.4 Job Monitoring

The information provided in this section is valid for SAP Web AS 6.10 and higher.

For SAP system Release 4.6x, you must make sure that you have installed the DBA Cockpit as described in SAP Note 300828.

You can schedule background jobs to display information about protocol records on all jobs that were executed by the SAP performance monitor by calling transaction DB6COCKPIT and choosing Jobs → DBA Log in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit. If you want to display details on a single protocol record, double-click it.

For more information, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

5.4 Database Backup Backups are complete copies of the database. You must perform backups on a regular basis in order to be able to restore the database to a consistent state that is as up-to-date as possible.

You can perform backups in online or offline mode:

• Online mode

Access to the database is not blocked. The users can continue to work normally during the backup.

• Offline mode

The backup process connects to the database in exclusive mode. The database can be restored without log files.

Page 111: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 111

In either case, the database can be restored completely and brought up-to-date by rolling in the log files generated after the backup was taken.

To perform both online and offline backups of the database, you can either use the BACKUP DATABASE command, the DB2 Control Center or the DBA Planning Calendar within the SAP system.

5.4.1 Backup Considerations

You cannot back up a database that is not in a usable state except for a database in the backup pending or the rollforward pending state.

The following is necessary to perform a backup:

• You must have SYSADM, SYSCTRL, or SYSMAINT authorization to use the BACKUP DATABASE command.

• You must start the database manager (db2start) before taking a database backup. If you want to use the DB2 Control Center, you do not need to explicitly start the DB2 Database Manager.

• In a partitioned database system, keep a copy of the db2nodes.cfg file with any backup copies you take. This copy is as a protection against possible damage to this file.

The database may be local or remote. The backup remains on the database server unless a storage management product, such as Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM), is used.

You can back up a database to a specified disk, a tape, or a location managed by TSM or another vendor storage management product.

After an online backup, DB2 forces the currently active log file to be closed and as a result it will be archived. This ensures that an online backup has a complete set of archived log files available for recovery.

5.4.2 Performing the Backup Backing Up a Single-Partitioned Database You can perform these actions either using the DB2 command line or the DB2 Control Center.

DB2 Command Line

1. Log on to the database server as user db2<dbsid>.

2. Enter the following command: db2 backup db <DBSID>…

For the complete syntax of this command check the DB2 documentation.

Page 112: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

112 July 2006

DB2 Control Center

Make sure that you have installed and set up the DB2 Control Center before performing these steps. Fore more information, see Installation of the DB2 Control Center [Page 61] and Setting Up the DB2 Control Center [Page 62].

1. Start the DB2 Control Center

2. From the context menu of <DBSID> choose Backup → Database… .

3. In the dialog box that appears, enter the required values, including the correct backup target.

4. Choose Backup now.

A job will be generated that can be monitored using the DB2 Control Center Journal.

Backing Up a Multi-Partitioned Database You can perform these actions either using the DB2 command line or the DB2 Control Center.

DB2 Command Line

1. Log on to the database server as user db2<dbsid>.

2. Enter the backup command for the catalog node: db2_all “<<+n< db2 backup db <DBSID> …”

For the complete syntax check the DB2 documentation and replace n wit the catalog node number (the default value is 0).

3. To back up all other nodes in parallel, enter the following command: db2_all "<<-n< db2 backup db <DBSID> ... "

DB2 Control Center

Make sure that you have installed and set up the DB2 Control Center before performing these steps. Fore more information, see Installation of the DB2 Control Center [Page 61] and Setting Up the DB2 Control Center [Page 62].

...

1. Start the DB2 Control Center

2. From the context menu of <DBSID> choose Open → Database Partitions….

3. From the context menu of the node number where the system catalog resides (default: 0), choose Backup….

4. In the dialog box that appears, enter the required values, including the correct backup target.

5. Choose Backup now.

6. Repeat steps 4 to 7 for all other nodes.

A job will be generated that can be monitored using the DB2 Control Center Journal.

Page 113: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 113

5.4.3 Integrity of Backups The db2ckbkp utility allows the user to test the integrity of a backup image on disk or tape and determine whether or not it can be restored. It can also be used to display the meta data stored in the backup header in order to determine information about a particular backup image. One or more parts of an image can be checked. You can use the utility as follows:

If the full backup consists of multiple objects, the validation will only succeed if db2ckbkp is used to validate all of the objects at the same time.

When checking multiple parts of an image, the first backup image object (.001) must be specified first.

db2ckbkp SAMPLE.0.krodger.NODE0000.CTN0000.19990817150714.*

If the backup resides on TSM, refer to the information about db2adutl and db6adutl provided in Managing Backups and Logs Archived on TSM [Page 131].

For more information about the db2ckbkp utility, see db2ckbkp - DB2 Check Backup Utility [Page 166].

5.4.4 Frequency of Backups and Time Required You should take full database backups regularly, regardless of how often log files are archived. A recent full backup means that there are fewer archived log files to apply to the database in case of recovery, which reduces the amount of time required by the ROLLFORWARD utility to recover the database. It also reduces the chance of a log file not being available (corruption or loss).

To reduce the amount of time that the database is not available, consider using online backups.

You can only use an online backup for recovery if the database log files that are created during the online backup are available.

Page 114: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

114 July 2006

5.4.5 Advanced Backup Techniques The following list provides information about advanced backup techniques:

• Incremental or delta backups

To reduce the backup and restore time, you can use incremental or delta backups. For more information, see the IBM documentation Data Recovery and High Availability Guide and Reference.

• Backup by file system copy

For information about using tool db2inidb as a mirror for a file system-based backup, see The db2inidb Tool [Page 132].

• Standby database for backup purposes

For information about using tool db2inidb as a standby database for a backup, see The db2inidb Tool [Page 132].

Page 115: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 115

6 Advanced Tasks

6.1 The db6util Tool The db6util tool contains a collection of utility routines that are mainly used during the SAP system upgrade. The following db6util options are also useful for database administration and troubleshooting and can be entered using the command line. To generate a complete list of all db6util options, you can call db6util –h from the command line.

The results or messages generated by all db6util commands may be redirected by the command options [ -o <log file> ] or [ -w <resultfile> ] .

Tablespace Free Space To generate a free space list for all tablespaces, enter the following command: db6util –f

DB2 RUNSTATS Options • To perform RUNSTATS on a single table, enter the following command:

db6util -r <tabname>

• To perform RUNSTATS on all tables specified in the file, create a file containing a list of tables and enter the following command: db6util –rf <filename>

• To perform RUNSTATS on all tables that were temporarily marked as VOLATILE in the database and to remove the VOLATILE attribute from the tables after RUNSTATS has run, enter the following command: db6util –rv

Tables that are marked with an N in the ACTIVE column in table DBSTATC are not affected by this option.

Database Lock Overview db6util helps to analyze database lock wait situations by extracting all involved processes from a snapshot for applications and displaying their dependencies in the form of a syntax diagram. Detailed information about those processes, such as the last SQL statement that was executed or lock types, is displayed.

• To display processes that are only involved in a deadlock situation, enter the following command: db6util –sd

• To display all processes that are involved in a lock wait situation, enter the following command: db6util –sl

Page 116: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

116 July 2006

Both commands can be executed with additional parameters to take snapshots periodically. Enter: db6util –sd [sleep time] [number of snapshots] db6util –sl [sleep time] [number of snapshots]

For more information about the syntax of db6util, see db6util - Tool to Assist Database Administration [Page 169].

6.2 Setting and Updating Passwords You can set and update the password of the users <sapsid>adm and sap<sapsid> or sapr3 (for systems up to and including 4.6D) using the command line: ...

1. Log on as user <sapsid>adm.

2. Enter the following command: dscdb6up <user> <password>

This command updates the contents of the dscdb6.conf file, which must not be modified manually, and the operating system password. On multi-partitioned systems, this must be done on all database nodes.

If you inadvertently delete or destroy file dscdb6.conf, you can recreate it by entering the following command: dscdb6up –create <sap<sapsid>/sapr3 password> <<sapsid>adm password>

The operating system passwords are not changed when you use the -create option.

6.3 Using the Journal in the DB2 Control Center Extensions Most tasks in the DB2 Control Center Extensions are logged in the Admin DB. You can access these logs by choosing Journal. You can display completed tasks, such as archiving or restoring log files, initializing tapes and also display tasks still running. In addition, you can display the logs of the user exit. To access the journal: ...

1. In the Log File Management, Tape Management or Log File Maintenance dialog box, choose Journal.

2. Choose the radio button with the category of actions you want to browse.

A list of actions is displayed with start and end time, return code (RC), category and return message.

3. If you want to see an action that took place more than seven days ago, you can use the Back button to go back in steps of seven days.

Page 117: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 117

4. Choose an action from the list.

The detailed output of that action is displayed in the Description group box.

To update the list of actions with the most current data, choose Refresh.

6.4 Advanced Log File Management Tasks As outlined in Basic Concepts [Page 23], you can archive log files either automatically using the User Exit or let the User Exit copy them to the archive directory. From this directory you have to archive them as described in Archiving Log Files from Disk to Tape or TSM [Page 98].

If you need archived log files for a roll-forward recovery, you have to restore them into the retrieve directory as described in Log File Restore of the SAP Database [Page 148]. The Admin DB ADM<DBSID> keeps track of the current location of the log files.

Page 118: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

118 July 2006

As outlined in Deleting Log Files [Page 101], you can delete log files from the log directory, archive directory, tape, storage management products and any other backend using a customer script. However, there are two special cases that require advanced log file management skills:

• Log files can have special states that can be maintained in special dialog boxes. These particular log files need to be deleted manually from the Admin DB. For details on how to delete these log files, see Deleting Special Log Files [Page 118].

• Tapes can become unreadable or can be lost. In this case, you must manually delete the entry for the tape from the Admin DB. For more information, see Deleting Tapes from the Admin DB [Page 120].

6.4.1 Deleting Special Log Files Use You use the following procedure to delete log files that can have a special status. The log files can be maintained in special dialogs. The status of these log files can be as follows:

• If you archive log files and choose at the same time to leave them in the archive directory (DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH), they have two locations assigned.

• If you retrieve log files, they have two locations assigned − the retrieve directory (DB2DB6_RETRIEVE_PATH) and the archive location (for example, on tape).

• A log file has the status invalid. This can happen if you restore a database without rolling it forward to the end of the logs. In this case log files with the same sequence number are created again. In the Admin DB the old log files are marked as invalid.

Procedure You can delete (or maintain) these special log files using either the DB2 Control Center Extensions or the DB2 command line.

Using the DB2 Control Center Extensions ...

1. In the DB2 Control Center select the SAP database <DBSID>.

2. From the context menu of <DBSID> choose SAP Logfile Management.

3. If required, enter user <sapsid>adm or db2<dbsid> and the corresponding password.

The Log File Management dialog box appears.

4. Choose Log File Maintenance… .

The Logfile Maintenance dialog box appears.

Page 119: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 119

5. Choose the node where you want to delete or maintain log files.

6. Choose one of the three radio buttons:

archived

Displays log files previously archived and not deleted from the archive directory.

restored

Displays log files previously restored.

from database

Displays log files known to the Admin DB and which are marked as INVALID.

7. Select a range of log files you want to delete.

8. Choose Delete.

Using the DB2 Command Line • To delete log files from the archive directory that have already been archived but not

removed from the archive directory, enter the following command: brarchive –ds –out

• To delete log files from the retrieve directory that have been restored but not removed from the retrieve directory, enter the following command: brrestore –dr –out

• To delete log files that are marked as INVALID, enter the following command:

brarchive –do -out

Page 120: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

120 July 2006

6.4.2 Deleting Tapes from the Admin DB Use You use this procedure to delete tapes that have become unreadable or were lost from the Admin DB to keep the content of the Admin DB up-to-date.

Procedure

Using the DB2 Control Center Extensions ...

1. In the DB2 Control Center choose the SAP database <DBSID>.

2. From the context menu of <DBSID> choose SAP Tape Management.

3. If required, enter user <sapsid>adm or db2<dbsid>.

The Tape Management dialog box appears.

4. In the navigation tree of the Tape Management dialog box, select the tape that you want to delete.

5. From the context menu choose Delete.

The Attention dialog box appears.

6. Confirm the operation by choosing Yes.

Using the DB2 Command Line To delete tapes from the Admin DB, enter the following command: brrestore –dt –v <tape> -out

To delete tape PRD01 from the Admin DB, enter the following command:

brrestore –dt –v PRD01 –out

6.5 Reorganization of Tables and Tablespaces Reorganization of Tables A table can become fragmented as a result of large numbers of updates, deletes or inserts, causing performance to deteriorate. In general, newly inserted rows cannot be placed in the physical sequence corresponding to the logical sequence defined by an index. This means that the DB2 Database Manager has to perform additional read operations to access the data, because logically sequential data may be on different physical pages that are not sequential.

Therefore, you should use the DB2 reorganization utility (REORG) to rearrange the data in the tables and indexes and to remove the free space that is inherent in fragmented data. The result will be faster accessing of data and, consequently, improvements in performance.

Page 121: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 121

The DBA Planning Calendar (transaction DB13) provides the following jobs for the reorganization of tables and tablespaces:

• REORG and RUNSTATS of Flagged Tables

You can use this job to reorganize tables, particularly those for which reorganization is recommended.

Whether or not it would be beneficial to reorganize a table is calculated by the Update Statistics Job described in Updating Statistics for Database Tables and Checking for Reorganization [Page 109].

This job displays a maximum of 100 tables recommended for reorganization as well as additional data, such as delta table size and the duration of the last reorganization. You choose which of the proposed tables to reorganize.

The selected tables are reorganized according to the order of the primary index using the DB6CLP tool. The table statistics are subsequently updated.

• REORG of Tables in Tablespace(s)

Sometimes, you may want to reorganize all the tables of a particular tablespace to remove fragmented data, thus increasing the free space. The DBA Planning Calendar (transaction DB13) provides a utility allowing you to do this.

The job uses the external program dmdb6rts to reorganize all tables of a tablespace and to subsequently update the table statistics.

• Automatic REORG

This job can be used to do automatic reorganizations of tables according to REORGCHK recommendations. This job is additionally controlled by user-defined limitations such as, for example, table size or runtime.

• REORG and RUNSTATS for Single Table

Yon can use this job to reorganize one single table

In all jobs you can specify the temporary tablespace where the DB2 Database Manager can temporarily store the table that is being reconstructed. If no temporary tablespace is entered, the DB2 Database Manager stores a working copy of the table in the tablespace in which the table being reorganized resides. This temporary table will be at least as large as the original table, so you must make sure that the tablespace used for reorganization has at least sufficient free space to hold the original table.

Keep in mind that you may be reorganizing a table within a temporary tablespace that is using pages larger than 4 KB (for example, 8 KB, 16 KB or 32 KB).

During the reorganization, the temporary tablespace, which is used during the reorganization, must have the same size pages as the base tablespace.

For more information, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

Page 122: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

122 July 2006

6.6 Redirected Restore The redirected restore tool brdb6brt retrieves a database backup and creates a CLP script for the restore of this backup image. Before you run the script, you can modify it, for example, change the name and structure of the database.

brdb6brt

Source DB

RestoreScript

CustomizedRestoreScript

User

brdb6brt

CustomizedRestoreScript

DB Copy

Retrieve Data &Backup DB

Create

BackupImage

Create

Edit

Create

Create

Check

Redirected Restorefor homgeneous

system copy

RedirectedRestore

to changecontainer

layout

1

2

34

5

6

7

8

9

The graphic above illustrates the tasks relevant to a redirected restore process. First of all, back up the database and retrieve data on the container layout (1) using tool brdb6brt. The tool creates a backup of the database (3) and a CLP script for restoring this backup (2). This script corresponds to the container layout of the database at the time of the backup. The script can then be adapted to the needs of the database to be restored (4). This can involve changes to the number, size or location of the containers for a restore to the same database (6 + 8). Another possibility is to perform a homogeneous system copy (9) that normally requires major changes to the script to match the new machine setup (5). Additionally, brdb6brt can serve to check the script (7). It reports any failure the restore process might encounter. In this way, failures can be avoided before they occur.

Page 123: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 123

6.6.1 Usage of Tool brdb6brt You can use the brdb6brt redirected restore tool to:

• Perform simple backups.

• Retrieve an overview of the container layout.

• Perform a redirected restore.

• Change the container layout.

• Perform a homogeneous system copy.

• Create a script for restoring certain tablespaces only.

• Check the restore script.

• Move existing containers do other directories.

• Change text during script generation if required.

The following sections provide example commands. For more information about the syntax of brdb6brt, see brdb6brt - Redirected Restore Tool [Page 160].

Performing a Simple Backup You want to make a backup of the entire database to TSM with two sessions. The source database is called SAMPLE. The backup is made online.

Enter the following command: brdb6brt –s SAMPLE –bm BACKUP –bpt ADSM 2 –ol

Retrieving an Overview of the Container Layout If you want to have an overview of the layout of the database containers, you can create a restore script only.

To do so for database SAMPLE as instance owner db2user with password PASS123, enter the following command: brdb6brt –s SAMPLE –bm RETRIEVE –user db2user –using PASS123

The script contains the current time as the backup timestamp. You can also use this script for a restore operation if you have taken a backup of the database separately. You will have to change the script to the timestamp of the backup image you created separately.

Performing a Redirected Restore After the script has been edited, it has to be executed from the command line. The DB2 Command Line Processor (DB2 CLP) provides an option allowing DB2 to read statements from a file. This is called background mode.

Enter the following command: db2 –tvf <script file>

Page 124: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

124 July 2006

The parameters have the following meaning:

Parameter Meaning -t Forces the CLP to use a semicolon (;) as terminating

character for an SQL statement. The use of this option is mandatory for the execution of the script.

-v Forces the CLP to print each statement on the screen.

-f <file> Forces the CLP to read the statements from the specified file. By default, the brdb6brt tool creates a script file of the name <DBSID>scr, where <DBSID> is the name of the source database.

If a backup and restore script of the database SAMPLE was created, the script should now be executed. Enter the following command: db2 –tvf SAMPLE.scr

Changing the Container Layout

The following procedure only applies if you are using DMS tablespaces. You must not use it for tablespaces that are managed by DB2’s automatic storage management.

You want to change the layout of the containers of your current database. This can comprise changing the number of containers of a tablespace, changing their sizes or their location in the file system. The following procedure is an example of of changing the container layout and storing the backup into three separate directories: ...

1. To create the backup and the restore script, enter the following command: brdb6brt –s <DBSID> –bm BOTH –bpt Y:\BACKUPS1 Y:\BACKUPS2 Y:\BACKUPS3

Since the database is rather large, the backup splitted and stored in three separate directories..

2. Edit the script SDB.scr and change the container’s location, size and number.

3. To change the container layout, restore the database using the following command: db2 –tvf <DBSID>.scr

Changing the Storage Path

The following procedure only applies if you are using AutoStorage tablespaces and a database that also has automatic storage enabled.

If automatic storage is enabled for a database, the database can have AutoStorage tablespaces as well as DMS tablespaces without AutoStorage. The database has one or more storage paths (that are database parameters) and automatically handles the space allocation for the automatic storage table spaces. The DMS tablespaces without AutoStorage are handled as described under Changing the Container Layout.

Page 125: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 125

The following procedure is an example of changing the storage paths for the AutoStorage tablespaces and storing the backup into three separate directories:

1. Create the backup and the restore script by entering the following command: brdb6brt –s <DBSID> –bm BOTH –bpt Y:\BACKUPS1 Y:\BACKUPS2 Y:\BACKUPS3

Since the database is rather large, the backup splitted and stored in three separate directories.

2. Edit the SDB.scr script and change the AutoStorage paths for the AutoStorage tablespaces.

3. To change the container layout, restore the database using the following command: db2 –tvf <DBSID>.scr

Performing a Homogeneous System Copy You want to copy your database to another machine. For this purpose the container locations have to be adapted. To do so for the database SDB, proceed as follows: ...

1. To create the backup and the restore script, enter the following command: brdb6brt –s <DBSID> –bm BOTH –bpt Y:\BACKUPS1 Y:\BACKUPS2 Y:\BACKUPS3

Since the database is rather large, the backup is splitted and stored in three separate directories..

2. Make the backup images and the script available on the target machine. This can be accomplished by copying them to the machine via ftp.

3. Log on to the target machine and edit the script SDB.scr. Change the container’s locations. You also need to adapt the location of the backup image to the directory where the containers are available on the target machine.

4. Restore the database by entering: db2 –tvf <DBSID>.scr

Page 126: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

126 July 2006

Creating a Script for Restoring Certain Tablespaces Only You want to back up one or more tablespaces rather than of the entire database. The tablespaces for backup have the names USERSPACE1, TBSPACE and TESTSP2. The backup is done to TSM (three sessions). The database name is SAMPLE. The restore script is created to restore only the specified tablespaces.

Enter the following command: brdb6brt –s SAMPLE –bm BOTH –bpt TSM 3 –tbs USERSPACE1 TBSPACE TESTSP2

Checking the Restore Script After the script has been edited, the script can be checked whether it would succeed on that machine. The check allows scripts that perform full database or tablespace level restores. Also, restoring to a new or existing database is considered. The user running the check should be the user that will later run the script with DB2 CLP, in most cases the DB2 instance owner (db2<DBSID>). To run a check on the SAMPLE.scr script, enter the following command: brdb6brt –bm CHECK -ip SAMPLE.scr

The output from the check run shows possible errors, warnings and information about the redirected restore operation that the script will perform. Possible errors start with [E], warnings with [W] and informational messages with [I]. The output is also saved to a file in the current directory. The file name is the script name replaced by the file ending .chk. In this example, the check output would be written to file SAMPLE.chk.

With the content of the check output, which is mainly error and warning messages, the database administrator now should be able to find errors in the script or on the database server system, for example, duplicated file names, missing write authorizations, out of space situations. Additional information about the used file systems is provided, such as:

• List of tablespace containers

• Information about used space

• Information about free space

• Information about missed space

• Information about required space in the DB2 log directory

Especially on UNIX database servers you should be aware that new tablespace containers will be placed in the topmost existing directory and therefore in the underlying file system. So before running brdb6brt, the tablespace container layout (distribution of tablespace containers in the file system(s)) should be implemented by creating file systems, directories and links to get sound check output.

If you have a multi-partitioned database, you need to run brdb6brt for all partitions of your database. To do so, use the –nn <node number> parameter. The scripts created include the partition number, which prevents existing scripts from other database partitions from being overwritten.

If you use the –nn all option, scripts for all database partitions are automatically created.

Page 127: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 127

Moving Existing Containers to Other Directories for DMS tablespaces

If you are using AutoStorage tablespaces and a database that also has automatic storage enabled, you must not use the following procedure.

With brdb6brt patch 5 or higher, you can create relocate scripts to move existing containers to other directories using the db2relocatedb tool. Furthermore, you can use these scripts to initialize mirrored databases with a modified container layout using the db2inidb tool and its parameter RELOCATE USING.

1. To create the relocate script, enter the following command: brdb6brt –s SAMPLE –bm RETRIEVE_RELOCATE

Script SAMPLE is generated. You need to modify it according to your requirements.

2. To move containers using the db2relocatedb tool, enter the following command:

db2relocatedb –f SAMPLE.scr

3. To initialize the mirrored database, for example, to create a database snapshot using the db2inidb tool, enter the following command:

db2inidb SAMPLE as snapshot relocate using SAMPLE.scr

Changing the Storage Path

The following procedure only applies if you are using AutoStorage tablespaces and a database that also has automatic storage enabled.

When automatic storage is enabled for a database, it can have automatic storage table spaces as well as “normal” DMS table spaces. The database has one or more storage paths (that are database parameters) and automatically handles the space allocation for the automatic storage table spaces. The “normal” DMS table spaces are handled as described under Changing the Container Layout.

To change the storage paths for the AutoStorage tablespaces, proceed as follows:

1. Create the relocate script by entering the following command: brdb6brt –s SAMPLE –bm RETRIEVE_RELOCATE

2. Edit the script SDB.scr and change the autostorage paths for the autostorage table spaces

3. Move containers using the db2relocatedb tool by entering the following command:

db2relocatedb –f SAMPLE.scr

Page 128: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

128 July 2006

Changing Text During Script Generation brdb6brt creates the scripts that are used to perform a redirected restore and to relocate the database (relocate DB script). The script then needs to be adapted according to your requirements.

With brdb6brt patch 5 or higher, a new parameter –replace <ReplaceDefinition> was introduced. You can use this parameter to adjust the script output during its generation instead of adapting the output manually afterwards.

For example, you can use this parameter to change the destination database name from SAMPLE to SAM and the container location from /db2/sample to /db2/sam:

brdb6brt –s SAMPLE –bm RETRIEVE –replace

SAMPLE=SAM,/db2/sample=/db2/sam

6.7 Command Line Tasks Using db6clp DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows provides the command line tool Command Line Processor (CLP) that allows you to administer your databases and instances as well as to access your databases via SQL.

CLP accepts certain administrative commands like BACKUP DATABASE and SQL commands like SELECT. However, you cannot chain commands on the command line.

On Windows you need a special environment to use CLP. The reason is that you can only access CLP on Windows by using a special command shell installed with DB2. Tool db6clp was developed specifically for this reason. It is actually a wrapper of the original CLP.

Page 129: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 129

It allows you to chain commands by separating them with semicolons. Furthermore, it is not necessary to call it in the special DB2 command shell on Windows. The tool is defined as an external command in the SAP system and can be used on all platforms. There are other additional functions, which are presented in the following table.

Option Meaning -a Explicitly attaches to the database instance before the command

execution. The instance is the one to which the database given with the –db switch belongs. If –db switch is omitted, <DBSID> is assumed as the database name.

If S is specified, the attachment is made using user sap<sapsid>.

If A is specified, user <sapsid>adm will be used.

The password is retrieved using the password services of SAP systems for DB2. Thus the correct environment must exist for a successful run (DB2DB6EKEY must be set).

This switch can only be used if the caller is one of the users db2<dbsid> or<sapsid>adm; or sapse<sapsid> on Windows.

-c Explicitly connects to the database given with the –db switch. If –db switch is omitted, <DBSID> is assumed as the database name.

For specification of S or A the same comments as for the –a switch apply.

This switch can only be used if the caller is one of the users db2<dbsid> or <sapsid>adm; or sapse<sapsid> on Windows.

-l Sets the environment DB2INSTANCE to this value before execution of the CLP command.

-db If this switch is specified without one of the –a and –c switches, an explicit connection to the database is only made if it is cataloged remotely.

-p Sets the partition of the database to which the command applies. This is applicable in multi-partitioned environments. The environment variable DB2NODE is set to the given value before the command execution.

-V Prints out version and patch information of the tool.

<command> The command to be executed by DB2 CLP. Multiple commands can be specified by separating them with semicolons.

Page 130: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

130 July 2006

The formal syntax of the command is as follows: db6clp -V |

[-a S|A [-db <db name>]

| -c S|A [–db <db name>]

| -i <instance>

| -db <db name>]

[-p <partition>]

<command>

See also:

• For more information about external commands, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library at SAP Web Application Server → Computing Center Management System → Background Processing.

• For more information about DB2 CLP and administrative commands, see the IBM DB2 administration documentation Command Reference.

• For more information about SQL, see the IBM DB2 documentation SQL Reference.

6.8 Monitoring Database Alerts For information about how to monitor database alerts, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

6.9 Monitoring Lock Waits and Deadlocks Monitoring Lock Waits A lock wait is a situation when one application updates or inserts a row without COMMIT and a second application tries to access this row. As a result, the second application gets the status lock wait.

You can access information about lock waits by calling transaction ST04 and choosing Performance → Lock Waits in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit.

If you want to display data for the first time, choose Refresh. You can choose between the display layouts by using the list box Layout.

For more information, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

Page 131: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 131

Monitoring Deadlocks Deadlocks are situations where two or more applications block each other, each waiting for the other(s) to release a lock, for example, application 1 and application 2 update or insert different rows without COMMIT. Then application 1 tries to access the rows that are locked by application 2, and application 2 tries to access rows that are locked by application 1. You can access the Deadlocks screen by calling transaction ST04 and choosing Performance → Deadlocks in the navigation frame of the DBA Cockpit. You can display all deadlocks that occurred in the past by choosing Show History.

For more information, see the SAP Online Documentation in the SAP Library.

6.10 Managing Backups and Logs Archived on TSM TSM distinguishes between:

• TSM backup copy group

A defined number of versions of each file is kept on the TSM server.

• TSM archive copy group

Each file is kept on the TSM server for a defined number of days.

The definition of kept versions and days must be performed on the TSM server and cannot be changed by the TSM client.

The following table shows which type of TSM copy group is used by DB2 and the Admin Tools.

DB2 Backup brarchive User Exit in Direct Mode

TSM Copy Group TSM backup copy group

Default: TSM archive copy group. If not present on the

TSM server then TSM backup copy

group

Default: TSM archive copy group. If not present on the

TSM server then TSM backup copy

group

To query, extract and delete backups and log files, you should use the following tools:

DB Backups Log Files saved with brarchive

Log Files saved using the User Exit in Direct Mode

TSM Backup Mode db2adutl

brarchive db6adutl

TSM Archive Mode -- brarchive db6adutl

Page 132: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

132 July 2006

To run the program db6adutl, use the instance owning user db2<dbsid>. db6adutl is part of the Admin Tools and is installed in the following directory:

• For 6.NN Admin Tools

UNIX: $INSTHOME/admintools/bin

Windows: %INSTHOME%\admintools/bin

• For 4.6D Admin Tools

UNIX: /usr/sap/<SAPSID>/SYS/exe/run

Windows: <drive>:\usr\sap\<SAPSID>\SYS\exe\run

The syntax of this command is provided in Appendix A: Tool Command Line Parameters [Page 157].

Additionally, db2adutl allows you to check backups, logs, and load copy images saved using TSM. This utility is installed in the following directory:

UNIX: $INSTHOME/sqllib/misc

Windows: <DB2 install path>\sqllib\misc

The syntax of this command is shown in Appendix A: Tool Command Line Parameters [Page 157].

For more information about TSM, see the TSM documentation at: www.tivoli.com/support/storage_mgt/adsm/pubs/

For more information about where log files are archived to on the TSM server, see Indirect Archiving to TSM [Page 88] and Archiving Directly to TSM [Page 80].

6.11 The db2inidb Tool DB2 tool db2inidb and the write suspend feature are new features of DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 7.2. Tool db2inidb in combination with hardware technologies like EMC Timefinder® or IBM ESS® provides the basis for fast backups or database clone creation.

With these technologies you can split up an entire file system very fast, that is create a split image of a file system. This split image can be mounted on a different machine, in a different directory on the same machine where the original file system is located or replace the current content of the original file system in case of failure. EMC Timefinder® or IBM ESS® also provide functions to archive a split image to storage devices, for example, tape.

The db2inidb tool provides the following options:

• as mirror

You use this option to create fast backups and fast database restores with nearly no system outage. For more information, see db2inidb Option: as mirror [Page 133].

• as snapshot

You use this option to create database clones for quality assurance or test systems. For more information, see db2inidb Option: as snapshot [Page 136]

Page 133: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 133

• as standby

You use this option to:

Create normal DB2 backups with nearly no system outage. For more information, see db2inidb Option: as standby for Backups [Page 138].

Build up a hot-standby system that is synchronized over log files. For more information, see db2inidb Option: as standby for Hot-Standby Database [Page 139].

The procedures provided in the following sections are only intended for experienced DB2 database administrators. Be aware that when using these options, problems with the log file management tools might occur.

For more detailed information about the db2inidb tool, see the IBM DB2 documentation Data Recovery and High Availability Guide and Reference.

6.11.1 db2inidb Option: as mirror Use You use the db2inidb tool option as mirror to:

• Perform fast backups or restores.

The split image is created while the database is in write suspend mode. The creation of the split image is very fast if you are using hardware technologies such as EMC Timefinder® or IBM ESS®. This means you have nearly no system outage during the backup of the split image.

To restore the database, you mount the split image and roll forward the database. The mount time of the split image is very fast compared to a normal database restore. This means you save the time for a normal database restore from a normal DB2 backup image.

• Compress backups with the standard system command compress before archiving.

For example, the split image can be compressed before you archive it to tape. Thus, tape space and I/O bandwidth are saved.

• Store log files to any storage management system.

Using this function you are not restricted to the destinations provided by the DB2 backup command. All storage management systems are able to archive files from the file systems. You use this function to store all important DB2 files and database containers.

With DB2, archiving and restoring the database files and database containers is only allowed in conjunction with the write suspend feature and the db2inidb tool for the regular DB2 backup and restore function. If you do not use these tools, you may cause irrevocable data loss or unexpected system behavior.

Page 134: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

134 July 2006

Procedure

Performing a Backup Ll...

1. To switch the database mode to write suspend, log on to the database server as user db2<dbsid> and enter the following command:

db2 set write suspend for database

The database only allows read access now.

2. Create the split image. The split image must include:

All database containers (sapdata*)

The database directory:

UNIX: /db2/<DBSID>/db<dbsid>

Windows: <drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\db<dbsid>

Make sure that the image does not include log directory, archive directory and retrieve directory. This is important because, if the split image is mounted for a database restore, the current log files, which are contained in these directories, will be overwritten with the old log files contained in the split image.

3. To switch the database mode back to normal operation, enter the following command: db2 set write resume for database

The database now allows full access again.

4. Archive the split image.

Performing a Restore 1. Log on to the database server as user db2<dbsid>.

2. To restore the split image using the storage management system tools, enter the following command: db2inidb <DBSID> as mirror

The database is now in rollforward pending mode.

3. Make sure that the log files required for rollforward recovery are available:

For direct archiving:

The User Exit retrieves log files as required during rollforward recovery directly from the storage management product.

For indirect archiving:

You have to recreate the Admin DB and restore required log files. To do so, proceed as follows:

i. Delete the Admin DB using the following command: db2 drop db ADM<DBSID>

ii. Restore the latest Admin DB backup SAR file using brrestore –ex or use the SAR file located in directory <DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR>\adminDB_<DBSID> using program sddb6ins.

Page 135: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 135

iii. To do so, enter the following command: sddb6ins –r <latest_Admin_DB_backup_SAR_file>

iv. Restore log files required for rollforward recovery using brrestore.

You can avoid the recreation of the Admin DB in this scenario if the Admin DB uses a file system that is not located in the default database path /db2/<DBSID>. Then the Admin DB is not contained in the split image and contains up-to-date information after the split image has been mounted.

By default, the Admin DB is created in the path specified by the database manager configuration parameter DFTDBPATH. You can use the redirected restore tool to move an existing Admin DB. Alternatively, if the Admin DB has not existed so far, you can set the database manager configuration parameter DFTDBPATH to a different directory, for example, to /db2/ADM<DBSID> before calling sddb6ins –i. You should reset parameter DFTDBPATH after sddb6ins –i was called.

4. Perform a rollforward recovery to the end of logs as follows:

a. Start the rollforward recovery using the following command: db2 rollforward database <DBSID> to end of logs

b. Check if the rollforward recovery is complete using the following command: db2 rollforward database <DBSID> query status

If the rollforward recovery is not complete, you have to correct the problem, for example, by providing missing log files and repeating step a.

c. Complete the rollforward recovery using the following command: db2 rollforward database <DBSID> to end of logs and complete

If the operation was successful, the database should now be in the most current state and can be accessed again.

Log File Management Considerations If you want to use indirect archiving, you have to consider the following:

If no normal database backup (that is a regular online or offline backup) was performed on the system, the log files are assigned to the last backup made on the system. This affects, for example, the usability of the brrestore –delete option.

Page 136: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

136 July 2006

The brrestore –delete option requires that you specify a backup timestamp. Since no normal backup is performed, the backup timestamp is not known to the Admin Tools. To avoid the log file deletion problem, brrestore option –force was introduced. If you use –force in conjunction with –delete <TS>, you can specify a timestamp that is not a backup timestamp.

As an example, the following command would delete all log files before 1 January 2003: brrestore –delete 20030101000000 –force

Since indirect archiving is very complex and thus very error prone in conjunction with db2inidb tool option as mirror, we strongly recommend that you use direct archiving.

6.11.2 db2inidb Option: as snapshot Use You use the db2inidb option as snapshot to create a database clone for test or quality assurance systems from your production system. In the past it was necessary to copy a SAP system using the homogeneous system copy. The homogeneous system copy requires a full database backup and a redirected restore on the target system. This procedure can be time-consuming if your source system is very large (for example, several 100 MB). The db2inidb tool option as snapshot allows you to perform a homogeneous system copy for large databases very fast.

Procedure On the source system:

...

1. To switch the database mode to write suspend, log on to the database server as user db2<dbsid> and enter the following command:

db2 set write suspend for database

The database only allows read access now.

2. Create the split image. The split image must include:

All database containers (sapdata*)

The database directory:

UNIX: /db2/<DBSID>/db<dbsid>

Windows: <drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\db<dbsid>

Log directory log_dir

The log files are required to roll back open transactions when db2inidb option as snapshot is called on the target system.

Page 137: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 137

Make sure that the split image does not include the archive and retrieve directory.

3. To switch the database mode back to normal operation, enter the following command: db2 set write resume for database

The database now allows full access again.

On the target system:

1. Prepare a standard SAP system environment for SAP databases using homogeneous system copy methods.

2. Mount the split image using the storage system tools.

3. To initialize the database, enter the following command: db2inidb <DBSID> as snapshot

Alternatively, if you want to change the container layout on the target system to distinguish it from the one on the source system, you can use the following command: db2inidb <DBSID> as snapshot using relocate <relocate db script>

You can easily create the <relocate db script> using the brdb6brt option –bm RETRIEVE_RELOCATE on the source system. All open transaction are rolled back and the target database can be accessed now.

Before accessing the target database, however, you should perform the following tasks to clean up the target system.

If the source system was configured for indirect archiving, you must delete the Admin DB on the target system. The reason is that the Admin DB, which uses circular logging (that is, LOGRETAIN is switched OFF), is included in the split image, but the db2inidb <DBSID> as snapshot command only supports databases where LOGRETAIN is switched ON.:

a. To delete the Admin DB, enter the following command: db2 drop db ADM<DBSID>

b. Prune the backup history file as the information included in that file is valid for the source system. To do so, enter the following command: db2 prune history force

..

Log File Management Considerations If you want to use the target system for quality assurance or test purposes, you should consider to set parameter LOGRETAIN to OFF and to use circular logging instead. Thus, you do not need to use the log file management tools.

Be aware that all databases using circular logging are subject to some restrictions, for example, online backups and rollforward recovery are not supported. If you require these features on the target system, you must reinstall and reconfigure the log file management tools on the target system.

Page 138: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

138 July 2006

6.11.3 db2inidb Option: as standby for Backups Use You use the db2inidb tool option as standby to perform fast backups with nearly no system outage, especially if you are using hardware technologies such as EMC Timefinder® or IBM ESS®. Backups and restores are simply performed with standard DB2 commands. In comparison to the db2inidb option as mirror, where split images are used to back up the database, normal DB2 backup images are created.

The normal DB2 backup images offer the following advantages:

• The backup image can be used to restore the database on a different hardware platform.

• The backup image can be used to perform a redirected restore.

• The backup image can be used to restore the database into a newer DB2 version, for example to build up a quality assurance or test system on a new database version.

Procedure

Performing a Backup On the source system:

...

1. To switch the database mode to write suspend, log on to the database server as user db2<dbsid> and enter the following command:

db2 set write suspend for database

The database only allows read access now.

2. Create the split image. The split image must include:

All database containers (sapdata*)

The DB2 instance directory:

UNIX: /db2/<DBSID>/db<dbsid>

Windows: <drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\db<dbsid>

3. To switch the database mode back to normal operation, enter the following command: db2 set write resume for database

The database now allows full access again.

4. Archive the split image.

On the target system:

1. To create a database instance using DB2 instance creation tool db2icrt, enter the following command: db2icrt <instance_owner>

2. Log on as instance owner.

3. To start the database instance, enter the following command: db2start

Page 139: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 139

4. Recreate the database from the split image:

a. Mount the split image.

b. Initialize the standby database using the following command: db2inidb <DBSID> as standby

5. To create a database online backup using the DB2 backup command, enter the following command: db2 backup db <DBSID> online to /tmp

Performing a Restore The backup images created with the backup command on the standby system can be used as normal backups for the source system. Thus, the restore procedure is equivalent.

The backup performed on the standby system is not listed in the backup history of the source system.

Log File Management Considerations If you want to use indirect archiving, you have to consider the following:

If no normal database backup (that is a regular online or offline backup) was performed o the system, the log files are assigned to the last backup made on the source system. This affects, for example, the usability of the brrestore –delete option.

The brrestore –delete option requires that you specify a backup timestamp. Since no normal backup is performed, the backup timestamp is not known to the Admin Tools. To avoid the log file deletion problem, brrestore option –force was introduced. If you use –force in conjunction with -delete <TS>, you can specify a timestamp that is not a backup timestamp.

As an example, the following command would delete all log files before 1 January 2003: brrestore –delete 20030101000000 –force

6.11.4 db2inidb Option: as standby for Hot-Standby Database Use You use the db2inidb tool option as standby to synchronize two databases using log files, that is you create a hot-standby database. Hot-standby database systems are used to:

• Avoid long restore operations after a hardware failure. The hot-standby database buffers are allocated and filled with the most recently changed data pages.

• Allow a fast recovery from logical failures.

In this case, the hot-standby system is kept in a state with a defined time delay compared to the source system. If a logical error is detected on the source system, you

Page 140: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

140 July 2006

can switch to the state of the hot-standby system that may not have applied this logical error.

The setup can be as follows:

The source database works normally. The hot-standby database is in roll-forward pending mode. All log files are created on the source database and are copied to the hot-standby database using the ROLLFORWARD command as shown in the following graphic.

source database

hot-standby

database

log_dir log_dir

log file copied on regular basis

source system hot-standby system

The following graphics show the differences for direct or indirect archiving.

Overview of Standby Databases If Direct Archiving Is Used

source database

hot-standby

database

log_dir log_dir

Storage Management

System db2uext2 ARCHIVE

db2uext2 RETRIEVE

hot-standby system

source system

Page 141: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 141

Overview of Standby Databases If Indirect Archiving Is Used

source database

hot-standby

database

log_dir log_dir

backend

db2uext2 ARCHIVE

db2uext2 RETRIEVE without DB

log_archive log_archive

Admin DB Admin DB

standby_dir

copy log file on regular basis

brarchive

hot-standby system

source system

Procedure

The following procedures describe the end of log scenario. The other scenario, that is recovering from logical failures, works according to the end of log scenario, but you must use rollforward to <point of time> instead of rollforward to end of logs to ensure the time delay for the hot-standby system.

Preparing the Source Database • If you are using indirect archiving:

Configure environment variable DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR in file init<DBSID>.db6. The User Exit then writes a copy of the log file into the standby directory in addition to the one the User Exit writes into the archive directory.

• If you are using direct archiving:

The central point for the log files is the storage management system. No further action is required.

Page 142: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

142 July 2006

Creating an Initial Hot-Standby Database Version On the source system:

Create a database snapshot of the source system that is used as the starting point for the hot-standby system: ...

1. To switch the database mode to write suspend, log on to the database server as user db2<dbsid> and enter the following command:

db2 set write suspend for database

The database only allows read access now.

2. Create the split image. The split image must include:

All database containers (sapdata*)

The database instance directory:

UNIX: /db2/<DBSID>/db<dbsid>

Windows: <drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\db<dbsid>

Make sure that the image does not include the log directory, the archive directory and the retrieve directory.

3. To switch the database mode back to normal operation, enter the following command: db2 set write resume for database

The database now allows full access again.

4. Archive the split image. ...

On the hot-standby system:

1. Create the database by mounting the split image from the source system.

2. Initialize the hot-standby database using the following: db2inidb <DBSID> as standby

The open transactions are not rolled back and the hot-standby database is now in roll-forward pending mode.

Preparing the Hot-Standby Database If you want to use indirect archiving:

1. Drop the Admin DB using the following command: db2 drop db ADM<DBSID>

The Admin DB of the hot-standby system is empty until the system failover.

2. Set environment variable DB2DB6_UEXIT_RETRIEVE_WO_DB in file init<DBSID>.db6 to ON.

The Admin DB on the hot-standby system does not have any knowledge about log files created on the source database. To enable the User Exit to retrieve log files during roll-forward recovery, you have to activate this flag. The User Exit then retrieves the latest log files with the log file number requested by the database engine during roll-forward recovery.

Page 143: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 143

If you want to use direct archiving:

If you are using TSM, you have to configure the same NODENAME (TSM configuration parameter) on the hot-standby system as on the source database.

Keeping the Hot-Standby Database in Synchronization with the Source Database To keep the hot-standby database in synchronization with the source database, you have to perform the following tasks on a regular basis.

If you want to use indirect archiving:

• In most cases, the standby directory (DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR) of the source database is a shared file system pointing to the archive directory of the hot-standby database system (DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH>/<DBSID>). If this is not the case, you have to transport the log files from the source database system to the hot-standby system.

• Perform a rollforward recovery on the hot-standby system (without the stop/complete option) using the following command:

db2 rollforward db <DBSID> to end of logs

• Delete log files that have already been applied to the hot-standby database using rollforward recovery and that have already been archived on the source system using brarchive.

If you want to use direct archiving:

You perform a rollforward recovery on the hot-standby system (without the stop/complete option) using the following command: db2 rollforward db <DBSID> to end of logs

The User Exit then retrieves the required log files directly from the storage management system, where the source database had stored them.

Switching Over to the Hot-Standby Database System If you are using direct archiving, you perform a rollforward recovery to the end of log files on the hot-standby system.

1. To start the rollforward recovery, enter the following command: db2 rollforward db <DBSID> to end of logs

2. To check if the rollforward recovery is complete, enter the following command: db2 rollforward db <DBSID> query status

If the rollforward recovery is not complete, you have to correct the error, for example, by providing missing log files and repeat step a.

3. To stop the rollforward recovery, enter the following command: db2 rollforward database <DBSID> and complete

If the operation was successful, the hot-standby database is now in the most current state and can be accessed again.

Page 144: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

144 July 2006

If you are using indirect archiving, you perform the following tasks on the hot-standby system: ...

1. Recreate the content of the Admin DB on the hot-standby system using the latest Admin DB backup SAR file. You can find the latest Admin DB backup SAR file in one of the following locations:

In the standby directory (DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR).

The SAR file is only available in the standby directory if you have set configuration parameter DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR_ADMDBSAR to ON in the init<DBSID>.db6 file.

In directory <DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR>/adminDB_<DBSID> that is located on the source system.

If the Admin DB backup SAR file is not in one of these locations or cannot be accessed, you have to perform an emergency restore using brrestore –ex.

To recreate the content of the Admin DB, enter the following command: sddb6ins –r <SAR file>

2. Perform a rollforward recovery to end of log files.

a. To start the rollforward recovery, enter the following command: db2 rollforward db <DBSID> to end of logs

b. To check if the rollforward recovery is complete, enter the following command: db2 rollforward db <DBSID> query status

If the rollforward recovery is not complete, you have to correct the error, for example, by providing missing log files and repeat step a.

c. To complete the rollforward recovery, enter the following command: db2 rollforward database <DBSID> and complete

If the operation was successful, the hot-standby database should now be in the most current state and can be accessed again.

Log File Management Considerations If you are using indirect archiving, the Admin DB of the hot-standby database does not contain any information about log files and database backups before the system failover. The system failover is relatively complex and error-prone. Thus, we recommend that you use direct archiving.

Page 145: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 145

6.12 Dual Logging Dual logging is a new feature of DB2 Version 7.2. It provides the option to keep two copies of the log files, which are normally only in the log directory.

To activate dual logging on DB2 V7: Set...

1. Set DB2 instance registry variable DB2_NEWLOGPATH2 using db2set. Enter the following command: db2set DB2_NEWLOGPATH2=ON

DB2 creates the name of the second log directory from the first log directory by adding 2.

2. To activate this change, restart the instance.

To activate dual logging on DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 8, proceed as follows:

1. Set DB configuration parameter MIRROR_LOGPATH. Enter:

db2 update db cfg for <DBSID> using MIRROR_LOGPATH <second log directory>

2. To activate this change, restart the instance.

DB2 calls the User Exit just once for each log file regardless if dual logging is activated or not. This means that the log files are not archived twice. If you use indirect archiving, the Admin DB keeps track of only one log file. brarchive stores only one log file.

6.13 Adjusting the Content of the Admin DB Use You adjust the content of the Admin DB by using the brarchive option –GAL.

Before you enter the –GAL option of brarchive you should use the preview mode with the –DMP option to make sure that your changes to the Admin DB are correct.

Procedure To adjust the content of the Admin DB, you use the following brarchive options:

• -GAL add

Log files that are not known to the Admin DB but located in the archive directory are added to the Admin DB.

Page 146: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

146 July 2006

• -GAL remove

Log files that are assumed to be in the archive directory but do not exist there are removed from the Admin DB.

• -GAL revert

With this option, you can revert the state of log files from ARCHRET (archive retained) to OFFLRET (offline retained) if the log files are still in the archive directory. The next time brarchive is run to archive log files, these log files will be treated like log files that have not yet been archived; they will then be archived again.

Page 147: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 147

7 Emergency Tasks

7.1 SAP Database Recovery If you are using a full database backup as a basis, you can choose to have DB2 apply all the units of work for any or all of the tablespaces in the database, up to any point within the time period covered by the logs ROLLFORWARD recovery. As long as all the log files are available covering the time period from the time of the backup through to the current time, roll-forward recovery re-applies the completed units of work recorded in the database logs to the restored database, tablespace or tablespaces. You can specify that roll-forward recovery is done to the end of logs, or to a particular point in time.

During the restore phase, a copy of the SAP database and SAP database logs is needed for recovery.

The database administrator db2<dbsid> or the SAP system administrator <sapsid>adm can restore or rollforward the database. In a partitioned database environment, the rollforward must be issued from the catalog node of the database. The restore command can be entered from the command line processor, DB2 Command Center or DB2 Control Center.

A database must be restored successfully before it can be rolled forward; but a tablespace does not. A database rollforward runs offline. The database is not available for use until the rollforward completes either by reaching the end of the logs during a tablespace rollforward, or by specifying STOP on the ROLLFORWARD command. You can, however, perform an online rollforward of tablespaces as long as SYSCATSPACE is not included. When you perform an online rollforward operation on a tablespace, it is not available for use, but the other tablespaces in the database are.

When the rollforward recovery method completes successfully, the last log that was used by rollforward is truncated, and logging begins with the next sequential log. The practical effect is that any log in the log directory with a sequence number greater than the last log used for rollforward recovery is re-used. You have to make a copy of the logs before executing the ROLLFORWARD command if not already done by the User Exit program.

The DB2 Database Manager ensures that an incorrect log is not applied during rollforward recovery, but it cannot detect the location of the required log. If the active log file is not sufficient for a recovery, the db2uext2 interface will be called with the RETRIEVE request to get the missing log file.

Restoring Databases from an Offline Backup Without Rolling Forward You can only restore without rolling forward at the database level, and not at the tablespace level. To restore a database without rolling forward, you could either restore a non-recoverable database, that is, a database that uses circular logging, or you could specify the WITHOUT ROLLING FORWARD parameter for the restore utility.

Page 148: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

148 July 2006

Restoring Databases and Tablespaces and Rolling Forward You do not have to recover your database with the latest backup copy of the database. You can start with any backup as long as you have the logs associated with and following that backup.

One type of problem that requires point-in-time rollforward recovery is the corruption of data that is caused by errant logic or incorrect input in an application. You can use rollforward recovery to recover the database to a point-in-time that is close to when the application began working with the database.

A log uses a timestamp associated with the completion of a unit of work. The timestamp in the log uses the Coordinated Universal Time (CUT). CUT helps to avoid having the same timestamp associated with different logs, for example, because of a change in time associated with daylight savings time. The timestamp used on the backup is based on the local time that the backup started. As a result, when you call the ROLLFORWARD command, you must specify the time in CUT.

Restoring Databases Using the New RECOVER DATABASE Command DB2 version 8.2 offers the new command RECOVER DATABASE that combines the functionality of the RESTORE DATABASE and ROLLFORWARD DATABASE command. Using this command, you specify a point-in-time to which the database should be recovered. You do not have to indicate which backup image must be restored or which log files are required to reach the specific point-in-time.

7.2 Log File Restore of the SAP Database As outlined in Basic Concepts [Page 23], you can restore log files either automatically using the User Exit program or you have to restore them from the retrieve directory. From there the User Exit is able to retrieve log files to the online log directory. If you choose to restore from storage into the retrieve directory, use one of the following procedures.

You can restore log files from storage (tape, TSM or any other backend where you archived log files to using customer script) either with the brrestore tool or with the DB2 Control Center Extensions for the SAP system.

Restoring Log Files with the DB2 Control Center: To restore the log files, proceed as follows: ...

1. In the navigation frame of the DB2 Control Center, from the context menu of the SAP database, choose SAP Log File Management.

2. If required, enter user <sapsid>adm or db2<dbsid>.

The Logfile Management dialog box appears.

Page 149: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 149

3. Choose Restore.

4. Choose the node where you want to restore log files.

5. To determine which log files are to be restored, choose a backup date.

All available log files for the selected backup are displayed together with the number of locations on which they are stored.

6. In the Restore logiles taken at group box select a log file range to be restored.

Due to a program limitation, the oldest log file must be at the start of the range.

Page 150: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

150 July 2006

7. To start the restore procedure, choose Restore.

The Select Location dialog box appears.

8. Choose the location to be used for the restore process.

The best location is the default value. All log files that can be restored from the chosen location are displayed.

If you choose a tape location from where all matching devices are retrieved, you have to choose a tape device in the Select tape drive field.

9. To start restoring from the selected location, choose Start.

A dialog box appears informing you that the restore process has been started.

After the restore has finished, a check is made whether all selected log files were restored. If so, a dialog box appears displaying a success message.

If there are still log files left to be restored, the Select Location dialog box reappears again and you have to repeat the process for all different locations where necessary. All restore actions and their results can be seen on the Journal screen.

Restoring Log Files with the Command Line Tool brrestore brrestore can be used to retrieve any log file archived using brarchive. Calling brrestore on the command line gives the administrator access to all command line options and may therefore be more flexible than using the DB2 Control Center.

The following tables describes the most common usage of brrestore. If this fails, an emergency restore can be attempted, although we do not recommend this action.

The -a arguments (shown in the following tables) must be log file numbers and not log file names. For more information about the syntax of brrestore, see brrestore - Log File Retrieval Tool [Page 163].

Page 151: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 151

Restoring Log Files From a Tape

Command syntax

brrestore -a 110-120 -d tape -v D4XA99 –out –sid SAPSID

Description This command tries to retrieve the log files with the numbers 110 to 120 from tape D4XA99. Messages are written to the standard output and a protocol file.

Restoring Log Files From TSM

Command syntax

brrestore -a 110-120 -d tsm –out –sid SAPSID

Description This command tries to retrieve the log files with the numbers 110 to 120 from TSM. Messages are written to the standard output file and a protocol file.

Restoring Log Files Archived Using Customer Script

Command syntax

brrestore -a 110-120 -d script –out –sid SAPSID

Description This command tries to retrieve the log files with the numbers 110 to 120, which where archived using your own script. Messages are written to the standard output file and a protocol file.

Emergency Restore of Log Files Using brrestore -ex Use this procedure either when both the Admin DB and the SAP database have been destroyed or normal log file retrieval methods fail. Do not use an emergency restore for normal management purposes, as the Admin DB is not updated.

We recommend that you first recover the Admin DB if necessary, and then use the standard restore command brrestore -a as described in the tables above.

Prerequisites • The SAP database has been restored from a backup and left in

ROLLFORWARD_PENDING state.

• You have started the database ROLLFORWARD and determined that DB2 requests log files that cannot be retrieved directly from the active log or by the User Exit from the archive or retrieve directory.

Page 152: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

152 July 2006

Procedure You can perform the following procedures using either the DB2 Control Center or brrestore.

DB2 Control Center ...

1. Locate the most recent backup of the Admin DB ADM<DBSID> on TSM or tape and recreate the database as described in Recovery of the Admin DB [Page 153].

2. Use the DB2 Control Center Extensions to restore the log files from TSM or tape as described in “Restoring Log Files” in this section.

brrestore

If you do not currently have access to the Admin Tools, you can restore the log files completely independently of the DB2 Control Center and the Admin DB. This procedure allows you to retrieve log files and Admin DB backups directly from tape or TSM. ...

1. After restoring the SAP database and starting the rollforward recovery, determine which log files are not yet available but will be required for the recovery process. That is, which log files were created after the backup was taken but are currently not in the log_dir, log_archive or log_retrieve directories.

2. To find out where these files are located, enter the following command: brrestore -q <file pattern> { -d tsm | -d tape -t <tape address> | -d script }

3. To restore the log files from the archive, enter the following command: brrestore –ex <file pattern> [<from time>[<to time>]] { -d tsm | -d tape –t <non rewind addr> | -d script }

<non_rewind_addr> is the non-rewind address of the tape for restoring from tape.

4. Put the files where DB2 or the User Exit expects to find them (log_dir, log_retrieve) and continue the rollforward recovery.

To restore all files from a tape on Windows, enter the following command: brrestore -d tape –ex "*" -t /dev/nmt0.1

To retrieve all log files in the number range 100 to 199 that were archived to TSM between November 1997 and the current day, enter: brrestore -d tsm -ex "S00001*" 199711

For more information about the syntax of brrestore and non-rewind addresses, see brrestore - Log File Retrieval Tool [Page 163].

Page 153: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 153

7.3 Recovery of the Admin DB

7.3.1 General Information The Admin DB contains information about objects such as log files and their locations. This information is required to process these log files, for example, to recover them. The Admin DB data itself may need to be recovered for the following reasons:

• The Admin DB is lost or damaged.

• The SAP system is being moved or a duplicate SAP system is being set up on another machine. The SAPSID and DBSID must remain unchanged. Otherwise, you must create a new empty Admin DB.

You can deal with these situations as follows:

• You create a new Admin DB and take a backup of the SAP database.

If you do not need the old log files, for example, on a test system, this is the fastest way of recovering or recreating the Admin DB. Otherwise, you must recover the Admin DB from a safety copy as described below.

If the Admi...

a. If the Admin DB still exists, drop it using the following command: DROP DB ADM<DBSID>

b. To recreate an empty Admin DB, call sddb6ins –i.

It is not essential but useful to prune the DB2 backup history file (PRUNE…).

c. Make sure that the SAP database parameters LOGRETAIN and USEREXIT are both set to ON.

d. Perform a full backup of the SAP database.

• You recover the Admin DB from a safety copy.

To make sure that the Admin DB ADM<DBSID> can be recovered, an export of essential information from that database is archived to the same target as the log files just archived.

brarchive does this export and archiving automatically after successfully archiving one or more log files. This database safety copy is not a database backup but a compressed archive file (adminDB<timestamp>.SAR) made up of individual table exports. This database backup image does not contain job information such as the one shown on journal pages in the DB2 Control Center. This data is lost when ADM<DBSID> is recreated using this image.

Page 154: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

154 July 2006

7.3.2 Recovery Process The recovery process consists of the following steps: Re...

1. Retrieving the Admin DB backup image from archive.

2. Recreating the Admin DB using sddb6ins or manually.

Retrieving the Admin DB Backup Image from Archive (TSM, Customer Script or Tape) A copy of the latest Admin DB safety copy export archive file (adminDB.<timestamp>.SAR) should be located in subdirectory <DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR>/adminDB_<DBSID>. If this file is available, you do not need to recover the Admin DB backup image from storage and you can continue with “Recreating the Admin DB” described further below in this section.

• TSM:

If the database log files were archived to TSM, Admin DB backup images are also stored there. To find the most recent file, it may be necessary to retrieve several or all SAR files from TSM. If you specify adminDB.*.SAR as the file pattern, all safety files will be retrieved. If you specify a part of the timestamp in the file pattern, the number of files is reduced. You can restore the SAR file from TSM using the following command:

brrestore –d tsm –ex <file pattern> -out

• Customer script:

If the database logs were archived using a customer script, Admin DB backup images are also stored using a customer script. You need to restore the SAR file manually from where the customer script has stored it.

• Tape:

If database safety copies (and log files) are archived to tape, restore the safety file of the Admin DB from the current tape to the current working directory using the following command: brrestore –d tape –ex <file pattern> -t <non rewind addr> -out

<non rewind addr> is the non-rewind address of the tape for restoring from tape. For more information about non-rewind addresses, see brrestore – Log File Retrieval Tool [Page 163].

You can use the pattern adminDB.20000626*.SAR to retrieve all safety files of the Admin DB archived on August 26, 2000. This pattern reduces the number of log files that are to be retrieved. To retrieve the above mentioned safety file(s) to the current working directory, enter the following command:

• For TSM: brrestore –d tsm –out –ex “adminDB.20000626*.SAR“

• For tape: brrestore –d tape –out –ex “adminDB.20000626*.SAR“

Page 155: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 155

Recreating the Admin DB The Admin DB can be recreated either using program sddb6ins or manually.

Recreating the Admin DB Using Program sddb6ins

1. Log on to the database server:

On UNIX:

As user <sapsid>adm and switch to user root (su root).

On Windows:

As user <sapsid>adm.

2. Create the Admin DB using sddb6ins. To do so, enter the following command:

sddb6ins –r <file name>

sddb6ins –r adminDB.20000626123504.SAR

This command performs the following actions:

• It creates the Admin DB.

• It extracts SAR file.

• It imports IXF files from SAR file.

• It adds backups, which were made after the SAR file has been created, to the Admin DB.

• It adds log files from log_archive that are not known to the Admin DB to the Admin DB. The reason is that these log files are moved to log_archive after the SAR file has been created.

Recreating the Admin DB Manually

1. To recreate the Admin DB step-by-step from the SAR file, enter the following command:

On UNIX:

a. Log on as user <sapsid>adm and switch to user root using the following command: su root

b. As user root, enter the following command:

sddb6ins –I

On Windows:

Log on to your database server as user <sapsid>adm and enter the following command: sddb6ins –i –db2dbnamepwd <password of user db2<dbsid>>

2. Extract the SAR file using the following command:

SAPCAR –xvf adminDB.<timestamp>.SAR

3. Import IXF files using the db2move tool.

Page 156: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

156 July 2006

4. To import the original data, call db2move as user <sapsid>adm from the directory where the archive was unpacked. db2move is located in the DB2 directory misc. Enter the following command: db2move ADM<DBSID> IMPORT –io INSERT_UPDATE

This command performs the following actions:

Backups that were made after the SAR file was created are added to the Admin DB (brarchive –q backups –out).

Log files that are not known to the Admin DB are added from log_archive to the Admin DB. The reason is that these log files are moved to log_archive after the SAR file has been created (brarchive –GAL add –out).

The output of the db2move command can be as follows:

IMPORT: -Rows read: 2109; –Rows committed; 2109 Table: SAPR3.DB6IDENTIFIER

IMPORT: -Rows read: 19; –Rows committed; 19 Table: SAPR3.DB6CONFIG

IMPORT: -Rows read: 774; –Rows committed; 774 Table: SAPR3.DB6LOGFILE

IMPORT: -Rows read: 1774; –Rows committed; 1774 Table: SAPR3.DB6LFSTATE

All errors and warnings are recorded in the table-specific message files named tab?.msg.

As a result, backups that are made after the SAR file has been created are added to the Admin DB using the following command: brarchive –q backups –out

Tool db2move also adds log files that are not known to the Admin DB from log_archive to the Admin DB using the following command: brarchive –GAL add –out. The reason is that these log files are moved to log_archive after the SAR file has been created.

Page 157: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 157

Appendix A: Tool Command Line Parameters brarchive - Log File Archive Tool

Page 158: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

158 July 2006

Command Parameter Actions

Parameter Action -h

-help

Displays the application command line syntax.

-V

-Version

Displays the application information and library version information if -d is specified.

-do Deletes obsolete files.

-dt Deletes tape with label volume from the Admin DB. For tape, also specify –v.

You use this option if the tape is lost or is physically damaged.

-i <subcommand>

-initialize ...

<subcommand> can be replaced by one of the following:

• show Displays the tape volume name (default).

• set Re-initializes the old archive tape.

• force Initializes the new tape or re-initializes the old tape containing the active log files.

-s Stores log file(s). For tape, also specify –v and –t. Files are not deleted on disk after they are archived.

-sd Stores and deletes log file(s). For tape, also specify –v and –t. Successfully archived files are deleted from disk.

-ss Stores each log file twice to backend. For tape, also specify –v and –t. Files are not deleted on disk after they are archived.

-ssd Tape only: Same as –ss action but removes original copies from disk.

-ds Deletes stored log file(s). Removes original copies from disk.

-q <type>

-query <type>

<type> can be replaced by one of the following:

• backups Displays the timestamps of all known backups.

• check Displays detailed information about a tape. Similar to -i show

Page 159: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 159

Command Parameter Modifiers

Modifier Description -d <device>

-device <device>

Device to archive files to retrieve files from tape, tsm or any other backend using a customer script. -d tsm can be followed by a single TSM management class or by two TSM management classes separated by ‘+‘.

-DEB [<level>] Switches on trace. <level> is a value between 1 (low detail) and 9 (high detail). However, the trace is normally turned on in the init<DBSID>.db6 file.

-one No automatic tape eject after successful archive operation

-out Displays the protocol on the command line (stdout).

Without this parameter no output is displayed except -h and -V.

-n <number>

-number <number>

Maximum number of log files to process. The oldest files are processed first. The numerical argument does not refer to a log file number.

-node NODExxxx

-node ALL

Node on which to perform processing or all nodes on which to perform processing. The default value is NODE0000.

- node ALL cannot be used with all actions. This parameter is only required with multi-partitioned systems.

-sid <SAPSID> SAP system ID to which the operation applies

-t <device> [<dev2>]

-tape_device ...

Tape only:

Tape device(s), for example, /dev/rmt/0 on Solaris. Two arguments are required for -ss and –ssd.

-v <volume> [<vol2>]

-volume ...

Tape only:

Volume name(s) on tape(s). Two arguments are required for -ss and –ssd.

-vndlib <lib> File name (including path) of the vendor library to load

brarchive and brrestore only automatically display output with -h and -V. To display the output for other actions, -out must be specified.

Page 160: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

160 July 2006

brdb6brt - Redirected Restore Tool brdb6brt runs in the following four modes:

• Backup/retrieve

• Check

• Tool information

The following sections provide syntax examples of each mode.

Backup/Retrieve Mode To create a backup or a restore script, use the following syntax:

Command Parameter:

Parameter Description -V Displays the version information (patch level) brdb6brt.

-h Displays an overview of the command line options of brdb6brt.

-bm BACKUP Creates a backup of the specified database only.

-bm RETRIEVE Creates the restore script for the specified database only.

Page 161: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 161

-bm BOTH Creates a backup of and the restore script for the specified database.

-bm RETRIEVE RELOCATE

Creates the relocate script for the specified database.

-s <SourceDB> Name of the database for which the backup and/or restore script should be created

-pp <ProtocolPath> Directory where the protocol file for the brdb6brt run will be written to. The default value is the working directory. The protocol file is named <SourceDB>.brp or <SourceDB>_NODE<NodeNumber>.brp in a multi-partitioned environment.

-i <ScriptPath> Directory where the restore script will be written to. The default value is the working directory. The restore script is named <SourceDB>.scr or <SourceDB>_NODE<NodeNumber>scr in a multi-partitioned environment.

-nb <NumberOfBuffers>

Number of buffers reserved for the execution of the backup. The default value is 2.

-bs <BufferSize> Size of the buffer for the backup operation, in 4 KB allocation units. The default value is 1024.

-es The restore script is created for experts, that is, only comments that are really needed are included.

-ol Backup operation is done online.

-ts <Timestamp> Only used in retrieve mode. If specified, the timestamp in the restore script is set to this value which must be in the form YYYYMMDDhhmmss. The default value is the current date and time.

-replace <ReplaceDefinition>

With this option you replace strings in the generated scripts for redirected restore and relocate. Parameter ReplaceDefinition must have the format <orig. string 1>=<repl. string 1>,<orig. string 1>=<repl. string 2>,…. This option only makes sense for –bm RETRIEVE, -bm BOTH and –bm RETRIEVE RELOCATE.

-parallelism <degree>

Allows you to specify the parallelism degree for backup and redirected restore operations.

-nn <NodeNr>

-nn ALL

In a multi-partitioned environment the backup operation is done against this node. The restore script is specific for this node and is named <SourceDB>_NODE<NodeNumber>.scr.

To address all nodes in one run, use option –nn ALL.

-bpt <Device> To back up the database to tape, specify a valid tape device. You can split the backup into multiple pieces by specifying multiple devices separated by blanks.

Page 162: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

162 July 2006

-bpt <Directory> To back up the database to a directory, specify a valid directory. Make sure it has sufficient space to hold the backup volume. It is possible to split the backup into multiple pieces by specifying multiple directories separated by blanks.

-bpt TSM [<NumberOfSessions>]

With this option you back up the database into TSM. Specify NumberOfSessions for the TSM connection.

-bpt XBSA [<NumberOfSessions>]

With this option you back up the database into an XBSA-compliant storage management system. Specify NumberOfSessions for the XBSA connection. This feature can only be used on DB2 V8.

-bpt VENDOR <LibName>

[<NumberOfSessions>]

With this option you use a third party shared library to perform the backup operation. Specify the library as LibName and optionally the NumberOfSessions.

-tbs <Tablespace> If this option is not specified, a full database backup is performed. However, you may choose to back up only one or more tablespaces of the database. To do so, specify the tablespaces separated by blanks. The restore script is created only for the specified tablespaces.

-user <Username> To perform the whole operation of brdb6brt as another user, you can specify the user name here.

-using <Password> Password for the specified user

Page 163: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 163

Check Mode Use this syntax to check whether a given restore script would succeed on this machine. The user who performs the check mode should be the instance owner of the database instance. The terminal output of the check run is written to a protocol file in the current directory. The name of the protocol file is <SourceDB>.chk or <SourceDB>_NODE<NodeNumber>.chk depending on the specified script name.

Command Parameters

Parameter Description -bm CHECK Checks whether a given restore script would succeed on

this machine

-ip <ScriptName> Name of the restore script to be checked on this machine. By default, the restore script is named <SourceDB>.scr or <SourceDB>_NODE<NodeNumber>.scr in a multi-partitioned environment.

-nn <NodeNr> In a multi-partitioned environment the check operation is done against this node.

-user <Username> To perform the database dependent checking of the check mode as another user, you can specify the user name here.

-using <Password> Password for the specified user

Page 164: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

164 July 2006

brrestore - Log File Retrieval Tool

Command Parameter Actions

Parameter Action -h

-help

Displays the application command line syntax.

-V

Displays application information and library version information if -d is specified.

-dr [<number>|<range>]

Deletes restored log file(s). Removes restored copies from disk.

-a <number>

-a <range>

Restores log file(s) from archive.

Each parameter is a log file number and not a log file name, for example, -a 5 or -a 5-10 to restore log file 5 only or files 5 to 10.

Page 165: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 165

-ex <pattern> Performs emergency restore of log files when the Admin DB is not available.

Tape argument -t must refer to a non-rewind device. Non-rewind address examples are described under “Non-Rewind Tape Device Addresses” later in this section.

-delete <timestamp> [<pattern>]

Deletes all known log files in an archive (TSM only) older than the given backup timestamp ts. An additional (optional) file pattern can be specified to force all matching files older than the timestamp to be deleted, even if they are not known to the Admin DB. If you want to specify a timestamp that is not a backup timestamp, you need to specify the –force option in addition.

-q <type>

-query <type>

<type> can be replaced by one of the following:

• adsmMC Displays known TSM management classes.

• <pattern> Requests a list of log files matching the given file pattern on the TSM server, for example, –q "*.LOG" (TSM only).

-force Currently only used in conjunction with –delete ts-.

Command Parameter Modifiers

Modifier Description -d <device>

-device <device>

Device to archive files to retrieve files from tape, TSM or any other backend using a customer script. -d tsm can be followed by an TSM management class

-DEB [<level>] Switches on trace. level is a value between 1 (low detail) and 9 (high detail). However, the trace is normally turned on in the init<DBSID>.db6 file.

-one No automatic tape eject after successful archive operation

-out Displays the protocol on the command line (stdout).

Without this parameter no output is displayed except -h and -V.

-n <number>

-number <number>

Maximum number of log files to process. The oldest files are processed first. The numerical argument does not refer to a log file number.

Page 166: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

166 July 2006

-node NODExxxx

-node ALL

Node on which to perform processing. The default value is NODE0000 or ALL nodes.

-node ALL cannot be used with all actions. This parameter is only required with multi-partitioned systems.

-sid <SAPSID> SAP system ID to which the operation applies

-t <device address>

-tape_device

Tape device, for example, /dev/rmt/0 on Solaris.

brrestore can only access one tape a time.

-v <volume>

-volume

Volume name on tape.

brrestore can only access one tape at a time.

-vndlib <lib> File name (including path) of the vendor library to load

brarchive and brrestore only automatically display output with -h and -V. To display output for other actions, -out must be specified

Non-Rewind Tape Device Addresses This form of the addresses is only required for emergency restore (-ex). With the exception of AIX, it is formed by adding an "n" to the standard (rewind) address:

• Windows: /dev/nmt0

• AIX: /dev/rmt0.1

• Solaris: /dev/rmt/0n

• Linux: /dev/nst0

• HP-UX: /dev/rmt/0mn

If you have more than one tape device to address, replace the “0” with “1”, “2” and so on as appropriate. For example, the non-rewind address of the second tape on Solaris is /dev/rmt/1n.

Page 167: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 167

db2uext2 - DB2 User Exit

Wrong usage of this function can make database backups unusable.

The user exit is normally only called by the database engine. The syntax description here is only for qualified SAP support personnel and administrators who have been explicitly instructed to perform an action involving the User Exit by SAP support.

Unlike the other programs described here, the User Exit parameters allow no spaces before their arguments.

The -SP and -LS parameters are only used if a raw device is used for logging.

DB2 Parameters Passed to the User Exit Program

Parameter Description -OS<os> Platform on which the instance is running, for example, AIX,

Windows, Solaris, HP-UX and Windows 98

-RL<db2rel> DB2 release level

-RQ<request> Request type, for example, archive or retrieve

-DB<dbname> Database name

-NN<nodenum> Local node number

-LP<logpath> Fully qualified path to the log files. The path must contain the trailing path separator.

-LN<log name> File name of the log file

-AP<TSMpasswd> TSM password. It is passed to the User Exit if it is provided in the database configuration.

-SP<startpage> Log extent starts at this number in steps of 4 KB pages of the device.

-LS<logsize> Size of the log extent in 4 KB pages

-V Displays the version information of the db2uext2 tool

Page 168: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

168 July 2006

db6adutl - SAP TSM Management Tool

Parameter Description QUERY Queries the TSM server for log files.

EXTRACT Copies log files from the TSM server to the current directory on the local machine.

DELETE Either deactivates log files or deletes log files on the TSM server.

ARCHIVE Performs action for log files in TSM archive copy group.

BACKUP Performs action for log files in TSM backup copy group.

BOTH Performs action for log files in TSM archive and backup copy group.

BETWEEN <sn1> AND <sn2>

Specifies that the logs between log sequence number 1 and log sequence number 2 are to be used.

DB <dbname> Considers only those objects associated with the specified database name.

NODE <n> Considers only those objects created by the specified node number.

WITHOUT PROMPTING The user is not prompted for verification before objects are deleted.

Archived Admin DB safety files (adminDB.<timestamp>.SAR) should be deleted using brrestore before changing from indirect archiving to direct User Exit archiving.

Page 169: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 169

db6util - Tool to Assist Database Administration

Parameter Description -h Prints help text.

-V Prints version information.

-n <dbname> Database name. The default value is the value of environment variable DB2DBDFT.

-auth User authentication. If this option is not specified, db6util tries to retrieve the <sapsid>adm password from the DB2 password service.

-o Log file. The default value is stdout.

-w Result file. The default value is stdout.

-r RUNSTATS on single tables and all indexes

-rf RUNSTATS on tables provided in file first

-rv RUNSTATS on tables with VOLATILE attribute. Tables flagged in DBSTATC with ACTIVE = N are not affected. The VOLATILE attribute is removed after RUNSTATS.

-f Gets tablespace free space information.

-dg Gets database parameter.

-dm Modifies database parameter.

-mg Gets database manager parameter.

-mm Modifies database manager parameter.

-sd Displays overview over deadlocked processes in application snapshot.

-sl Displays overview over deadlocked processes and processes in lock wait status in application snapshot.

Page 170: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

170 July 2006

dmdb6bkp - Database Backup Tool

Command Parameters

Parameter Description <dbName> Specifies the SAP database name <DBSID>.

NODExxxx Partition number, for example, NODE0002

ONLINE | OFFLINE Specifies online or offline backup mode.

ADSM OPEN <num> SESSIONS Number of I/O sessions to be used with TSM

TSM OPEN <num> SESSIONS Identical to the –ADSM option

TO <targetArea> Lists directory or tape device names.

XBSA <vendorLibrary> Name of shared library that is compliant with the XBSA standard, whichcontains the vendor backup I/O functions

LOAD <vendorLibrary> OPEN <num> SESSIONS

Name of shared library containing the vendor backup I/O functions and the number of I/O sessions to be used

BUFFERS <num> Number of buffers to be used

BUFFERSIZE <size> Size, in pages, of the buffer used when building the backup image. The default value is 1024.

PARALLELISM <p> Number of buffer manipulators to be spawned during the backup process. The default value is 1.

Page 171: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 171

INCREMENTAL Specifies a cumulative backup image. The backup includes all database data that has changed since the most recent successful full backup. –

INCREMENTAL DELTA Specifies a non-cumulative backup image. The backup includes all database data that has changed since the most recent successful backup of any type.

COMPRESS Indicates,that a backup should be compressed.

COMPRLIB-name Indicates the name of the library to be used to perform the compression (fully qualified path). If this parameter is not set, the default DB2 compression library is used.

EXCLUDE Indicates that the compression library will not be stored in the backup.

COMPROPTS Describes a block of binary data that will be passed to the initialization routine of the compression library.

UTIL_IMPACT_PRIORITY Specifies, that the backup will run in throttled mode, with the priority specified. Throttling allows to control the impact of the backup operation on the database performance

INCLUDE LOGS Specifies that the backup image should include the range of log files that are required to restore and rollforward the backup image to some consistent point in time.

You cannot use this option for an offline backup.

EXCLUDE LOGS Specifies that the backup image does not include any database transaction log files. By default, this is option is set.

Page 172: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

172 July 2006

dmdb6srp - Update Statistics Tool

Command Parameters

Parameter Description -V Prints out the version information (patch level) of

dmdb6srp

-h Prints out an overview of the command line options of dmdb6srp

-n <dbsid> Specifies the SAP database name <DBSID>.

-t ALL Performs the operation on all database tables.

-t DBSTAT Performs the operation on all selected DBSTATC tables.

-t CALL Calculates REORGCHK information about all database tables with current statistics.

-t <tabschema>.<tabname> Table name, for example, SAPR3.MONI

-m <statisticalOption> To use a statistical option, specify one of the following letters:

• Y Basic table and extended index statistics This is the default value.

• B Basic table and basic index statistics.

• T Basic table and no index statistics

• A Distributed table and extended index statistics

• E Distributed table and basic index statistics

• D Distributed table and no index statistics

• I Basic Index and no table statistics

• X Extended Index and no table statistics

Page 173: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 173

-z <maxRuntime> Maximum amount of time (in minutes) for the execution of the program. The default value is 300 minutes.

-P Does NOT write protocol data to CCMS protocol tables

-I Ignores column dbstatc-ameth – In case you perform a RUNSTATS for a single table, you can override the DBSTATC entry for the analysis method for the specific table. Without the –I parameter, a given –m analysis method would have no effect.

-l <longFieldTimeFrame> Maximum amount of time (in minutes) spent on the calculation of the size of long fields. The default value is 3 minutes.

dmdb6rts - Table Reorganization Tool

Command Parameters

Parameter Description -V Prints out the version information (patch level)

dmdb6rts

-h Prints out an overview of the command line options for the tool dmdb6rts

-n <dbName> Specifies the SAP database name <DBSID>.

-t <tablespace> Specifies the name of the tablespace that contains the tables to be reorganized.

-m <tempTablespace>

Specifies the name of the tablespace where the DB2 Database Manager can temporarily store the table being reconstructed.

The page size must match the page size of the tablespace specified with the –t switch.

Page 174: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

174 July 2006

sddb6ins - Admin Tools Installation Program

On UNIX, sddb6ins must always be called with root authorization but with the user environment for user db2<dbsid> as described in Installation and Setup [Page 41].

Command Parameters

Parameter Description

-h Prints the usage of sddb6ins.

-V Prints the version of sddb6ins.

-i [<target release>] Installs the Admin Tools. The default value of <target release> is the release of sddb6ins.

-u <start SAP release> [<target release>]

Upgrades the Admin Tools. <start release> indicates the release of the already installed Admin Tools (for example, 46D). The default value of <target release> is the default release of sddb6ins.

-d Deinstalls the Admin Tools

-r [<adminDB backup image>] Recreates the Admin DB using the Admin DB backup SAR file.

-checkonly [<target release>] Checks if the Admin Tools are installed correctly. The default value of <target release> is the release of sddb6ins.

Page 175: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 175

[-db2dbnamepwd <pwd>] [-sidadmpwd <pwd>]

Windows only: [-db2dbnamedomain <domain>] [-sidadmdomain <domain>]

All of these parameters have useful default values, except -db2dbnamepwd <pwd>. The following default values apply:

• The value of the USERDOMAIN environment variable is the default value for <domain>.

• The value for -sidadmpwd <pwd> is read from the dscdb6up password file.

For the installation of the 6.NN Admin Tools on Windows, the -db2dbnamepwd <pwd> is mandatory.

-s <SAPSID> Specifies the SAP system ID. The value of the SAPSYSTEMNAME environment variable is the default value for <SAPSID>.

-DEB [<level>] Activates the tracing facility. The detail level can be specified using <level>. <level> can be between 1 and 9. The default value is 3. The value 9 means "very detailed".

-NOADMDB The Admin DB is not needed because log files are archived directly to the vendor storage product by the User Exit program.

Page 176: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

176 July 2006

sddb6mir - Admin DB Creation and Mirror Tool Utility

Command Parameters

Parameter Description -V Prints out the version information (patch level) of sddb6mir

-h Prints out an overview of the command line options of sddb6mir

-m Mirrors the Admin DB ADM<DBSID> to the SAP database <DBSID>.

-DEB [<level>]

Activates the tracing facility. The detail level can be specified using <level>. <level> can be between 1 and 9. The default value is 3. The value 9 means “very detailed”.

Page 177: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 177

Appendix B: Troubleshooting

DB2 Traces The DB2 software provides several trace facilities to track down a variety of problem categories that might occur when running or developing DB2 applications.

The decision to run a trace must be carefully met. The following facts should be taken into consideration:

• In most cases, system performance will decrease.

• It is a time-consuming task.

• The amount of trace data can be enormously large. For this reason, it is essential to find the smallest possible scenario that reproduces the problem. It might be necessary to drill down, or even stop other activities while recreating the problem situation with the trace turned on.

• Interpreting trace data properly requires detailed low-level knowledge of DB2. For this reason, traces are usually only run at the request of DB2 support.

• Problem situations that have been observed might disappear during attempts to reproduce them with the trace turned on.

All DB2 traces are documented in the Troubleshooting Guide of the DB2 Online Documentation delivered with the software.

DB2 Trace Facility db2trc The DB2 trace, controlled by the command db2trc, traces events. It must be run by the DB2 instance owner on the database server. To get an overview of the available options, run the command with no options.

When turned on, options for the location of trace data are:

• In shared memory

For this, the amount of memory available for tracing is limited by the amount of available shared memory. In many cases, this reduces the duration of the trace to a few minutes. Once the problem has been traced, trace data first needs to be dumped before the trace is turned off.

• In a file

This severely affects performance. Given the number of activities in an SAP environment, DB2 will probably come to a standstill.

To get the trace into readable form, trace data needs to be formatted on the system the trace was taken on.

Page 178: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

178 July 2006

Usually, the sequence of activities using this kind of trace is as follows: ...

1. To store trace data in a preallocated buffer of size <memory> in shared memory, turn the trace on by entering the following command: db2trc on –l <memory> -s

2. Reproduce the problem.

3. Dump the trace data to a file named, for example db2trc.dmp, by entering the following command: db2trc dmp db2trc.dmp

4. Turn off the trace by entering the following command: db2trc off

5. Format the trace into two files, db2trc.fmt and db2trc.flw by entering the following command: db2trc fmt db2trc.dmp db2trc.fmt

db2trc flw db2trc.dmp db2trc.flw

While formatting, the output is written to the screen. If the output mentions that the trace has wrapped, the amount of memory reserved for trace data was insufficient and the trace might not be useful. The trace needs to be repeated with a larger amount of memory. Typical values to start with are 20000000 or 40000000 (20 or 40 million bytes).

DB2 CLI Trace The DB2 CLI trace traces all activities of the Call Level Interface (CLI), that is, the SQL interface of DB2. It is run on the machine running the DB2 application program. It is activated for an application process when the trace is turned on or the process connects to the database. There is no option to activate the trace for a process while it is being connected to the database.

Procedure ...

1. To turn the DB2 CLI trace on or off, log on as DB2 instance owner.

2. To activate the trace, parameter TRACE in the CLI configuration needs to be set to 1. To do so for all databases in a DB2 instance, enter the following command: db2 update cli cfg for section common using trace 1

3. To de-activate the trace, enter the following command: db2 update cli cfg for section common using trace 0

4. To configure the trace, several parameters can be set. Enter the following command: db2 update cli cfg for section common using <parameter> <value>

5. To verify the current settings, enter the following command: db2 get cli cfg

Page 179: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 179

Examples of Available Parameters

Parameter Description TRACEFILENAME <file> Path of the file containing all trace data

TRACEPATHNAME <path> Directory to store trace files, one per process

TRACEFLUSH 0|1 If this parameter is set to 1 it forces a write to disk for each entry.

Admin Tools Traces You can activate all tracing activities of most SAP DB2 kernel tools using variable settings in environment file init<DBSID>.db6. This environment file is located in the $INSTHOME/admintools directory (UNIX) or on the environment settings (Windows, also Registry settings). Each component of the Admin Tools can be traced separately.

The trace output is intended for experienced support personnel and the application developers. There are often several items that appear to be errors, but are acceptable under certain conditions.

Environment Variables

Environment Variable Values DB2DB6_TRC_<TOOL> ON or OFF

Default value: OFF

For example: DB2DB6_TRC_DB2UEXT2=ON

DB2DB6_TRC_<TOOL>_LEVEL Default value: 2

1 Errors Error tracing

2 Footprint Function internal info

3 DEV: Development trace

DB2DB6_TRC_<TOOL>_PATH Any path where db2<dbsid> has write access. For example: DB2DB6_TRC_DB2UEXT2_PATH/db2/PRD/admintools/TraceFiles

DB2DB6_TRC_<TOOL>_FILE A fixed name for the file to be used for all traces, which is overwritten by each new trace. This should normally be left unset to use the default behavior of creating one file per trace.

In the table above, <TOOL> is DB2UEXT2, BRARCHIVE, BRRESTORE, SDDB6JDS, or BRDB6BRT.

Page 180: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

180 July 2006

You can control brarchive and brrestore tracing using the command line option –DEB, which overrides the environment, or an optional trace level and trace directory. The trace level can have a value between 0 and 9.

Tracing of sddb6ins can only be activated using the command line option -DEB. You can neither use the environment nor the ini file.

Default Trace File Names

Admin Tools File Names

DB2 administration server sddb6jds.<timestamp>.trc

DB2 User Exit db2uext2.<timestamp>.trc

Log file management brarchive.<timestamp>.trc brrestore.<timestamp>.trc

Data collector dmdb6rdi.<timestamp>.trc

Update statistics dmdb6srp.<timestamp>.trc

Redirected restore brdb6brt.<timestamp>.trc

Backup tool dmdb6bkp.<timestamp>.trc

DB6CLP (command line processor) db6clp.<timestamp>.trc

The default trace file directories are:

• UNIX: $INSTHOME/admintools/TraceFiles

• Windows: %INSTHOME%\admintools\TraceFiles

Downloading Admin Tool Patches from SAP Service Marketplace

Ggf. Verweis auf Hinweis, in dem die DL parameter stehen … (BRITTA) Was is hier nochmal mit DL gemeint?

You can download the latest available versions of the Admin Tools from SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/patches.

For 4.6D Admin Tools • For 32 Bit

Choose SAP R/3 → SAP R/3 4.6C → Binary Patches → SAP KERNEL 4.6D → <Your OS> → DB2 UDB.

• For 64 Bit

Choose SAP R/3 → SAP R/3 4.6C → Binary Patches → SAP KERNEL 4.6D 64-BIT → <Your OS> → DB2 UDB.

Page 181: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 181

For 6.NN Admin Tools • For 32 Bit

Choose SAP Web AS → SAP Web AS <Release> → Binary Patches → SAP KERNEL <Release> → <Your OS> → DB2 UDB.

• For 64 Bit

Choose SAP Web AS → SAP Web AS <Release> → Binary Patches → SAP KERNEL <Release> 64-BIT → <Your OS> → DB2 UDB.

There is no Unicode version of sddb6ins. Therefore, you must use the non-Unicode version.

For brdb6brt, there is both a Unicode and a non-Unicode version.

The following table provides an overview of the files available:

File Description SAPCAR.CAR Contains the extraction tool SAPSAR(.exe).

DB6CCEXT_HW.SAR Contains the SAP DB2 Control Center Extensions.

sddb6ins.CAR/SAR Contains the installation program sddb6ins(.exe).

dscdb6up.CAR UNIX only and only for SAP system Releases 4.6x

Keep in mind that HW stands for UNIX if the DB2 Control Center runs on UNIX, or I386 if it runs on Windows.

Page 182: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

182 July 2006

Troubleshooting Admin Tools and Programs The following section provides information and advice on how to proceed when problems occur.

General Troubleshooting Comments Many recent customer problems were caused by problems with the runtime environment. An installation may not have completed successfully, or a user inadvertently changed the environment. For example, an environment variable was changed or unset, or file or directory authorizations were changed. You can now check the runtime environment for the Admin Tools by calling sddb6ins –checkonly.

Password file problems are also common. Use dscdb6up to resynchronize passwords. For detailed information, see Setting and Updating Passwords [Page 116]. Also, check that the operating system user has not revoked users.

Problems with devices are a frequent issue. Older versions of the Admin Tools, that is, SAP system Release 3.1I, are not compatible with TSM. ADSM must be still used in this case.

Initializing tapes with non-default values, for example, with a different block size, will cause problems if these values conflict with the parameters in those in the Admin DB. For more information, see Changing the Admin Tools Configuration [Page 70].

If brrestore or brarchive can not terminate properly, a lock file may be left behind. Running the tool again will cause an LFA158 error that will contain the path of the lock file. Ensure that neither brarchive nor brrestore are running and delete the file.

Often, defects that you find have already been found and addressed. Downloading and installing the latest patch from SAP Service Marketplace will often resolve the problem. For more information, see Downloading Admin Tool Patches from SAP Service Marketplace [Page 180] in this appendix.

Customers occasionally run out of disk space. Make sure that the DB2 protocol file db2diag.log in the db2dump directory has not become too large. Running brarchive will free up space by removing log files from the archive directory. If the database cannot be started, it may be necessary to first temporarily move some log files out of the log directory to provide space. It is important to choose only the most recent inactive files as the user exit and brarchive will move older files first. Make sure that files are no longer active before moving them. As soon as enough space is available, when the User Exit has archived several files, brarchive should then be called and the log files in temporary storage moved back to the log directory.

Page 183: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 183

Initial Troubleshooting Steps Implement the following steps until the problem is resolved. ...

1. Look in the protocol file for the error.

2. Look up the meaning of the error message in this appendix.

3. Perform the suggested action.

4. If there is an SQL return code in the error message, look it up in the DB2 Message Reference and perform the recommended action.

5. Search SAP Notes for solutions to previous occurrences of this error.

6. Check SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/patches for new patches. Download and install the latest patch version.

7. If not, run the installation tool with the -checkonly option and check the output. Make any appropriate adjustments to the runtime environment.

8. Switch on Admin Tool tracing. Run the action again. Create a message using SAPNet − R/3 Frontend. Upload the protocol and trace files, the protocol file init<DBSID>.db6, and any core file to the SAP server.

To ensure efficient troubleshooting, go through the above steps and gather as much information as possible about the problem before contacting SAP support.

Installation (sddb6ins) Troubleshooting Installation Failure In general, if the installation or upgrade has not completed successfully, you can retry this operation without causing data loss. The following error can occur during the installation of the Admin Tools:

Error Message

Error opening file <file> with mode wb.

Reason File cannot be replaced because the executable or shared library is currently in use.

Action Required

Retry installation or upgrade operation.

Common Installation Problem The password file is inconsistent with the operating system; variable DB2DB6EKEY changed. The passwords given when installing the SAP system or using the dscdb6up utility must match the operating system passwords for the same users. DB2DB6EKEY must have the same value on all systems. By default, the value is based on the machine name, which is often different on multi-node systems (DB2 UDB EEE V7 or DB2 UDB ESE V8 with multiple partitions).

Page 184: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

184 July 2006

User Exit Troubleshooting The following errors might occur:

• The log directory (database parameter LOGPATH) becomes full.

• No new log files appear in the archive directory.

• Entries in diagnostic file db2diag.log and db2alert.log or db2uext2.err.NODEXXXX (located in the DIAGPATH database parameter) report a User Exit failure.

To check the reasons for these errors, you can use the following procedure that is valid for the ARCHIVE and RETRIEVE actions of the DB2 User Exit program: ...

1. Look at the db2uext2 protocol and error files.

These files are located in the DIAGPATH database parameter and are written for each database partition. The file names are as follows:

Protocol file: db2uext2.log.NODEXXXX

Error file: db2uext2.err.NODEXXXX

2. Look at the journal page for User Exit entries. See the following table for details.

For the User Exit error message, the return codes have the following description:

User Exit Error Messages

Return Code

Description

0 Successful

1 DB2 shared library not found. For detailed analysis, activate the tracing facility. On UNIX: Verify if environment variable INSTHOME is set correctly.

4 Temporary error encountered (system memory). Retry. If the problem persists, contact your system administrator and SAP support.

5 TSM shared lib could not be loaded.

Check if the specified shared library is in the path of the DB2 instance owner: UNIX: libApiDS (for 64bit libApiDS64) Windows: ADSM32.dll If files are being archived directly to TSM by the User Exit, check environment variable DB2DB6_VENDOR_UEXIT.

6 Function module in the shared library could not be loaded. Check previous error messages.

8 The User Exit returns this value to the DB2 Database Manager for most failures. The DB2 Database Manager automatically retries archive operations again after five minutes. If processing of the same log file fails repeatedly, check the error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information.

Page 185: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 185

12 Hardware error

16 Error with the User Exit program or system function used by the program, for example, signal handling). Retry. If the problem persists, contact SAP support.

20 Error with one or more of the parameters passed to the User Exit program. Check whether you are using a version of db2uext2 that is compatible with the database product release.

21 Invalid database parameter. This is an internal error that you must report to SAP support.

22 Invalid database manager parameter. This is an internal error that you must report to SAP support.

23 Admin DB access error. Contact SAP support.

24 The User Exit program was not found. This return code is recorded in the db2diag.log. Check if program db2uext2 is available in the following directories: UNIX: $INSTHOME/sqllib/adm/

Windows: <DRIVE>:\sqllib\bin\

28 Failure of I/O

30 File I/O error. Accompanying message should contain the system error number defined in file errno.h.

32 Operator or user terminated process

33 Operator or user terminated process

34 Copy of log file (archive or retrieve operation) failed

35 • Archive operations:

If the source is the log file to be archived by the DB2 User Exit, this is just a warning. The log file has probably been moved out of the online log directory. Make sure that the log file is still available. If not, you may have problems if a database recovery becomes necessary.

• Retrieve operations (ROLLFORWARD):

If the DB2 User Exit was called to retrieve log files, the log file could not be found in either the archive or the retrieve directory. Attempt to retrieve it using brrestore. If the file does not exist (and never has existed) you are finished and can perform ROLLFORWARD STOP. This is a safety feature to ensure that the ROLLFORWARD is not accidentally stopped when log files still exist that could be recovered using brarchive. This is deliberately different to the default (simplified) User Exits provided as source code together with DB2.

36 Opening file failed. Log file does not exist. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information.

Retrieve operations (ROLLFORWARD): This is not necessarily an error. Ensure that the file has never existed and then perform ROLLFORWARD STOP.

Page 186: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

186 July 2006

37 Opening file failed. Check the messages and access authorizations. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information.

38 Reading from file failed. Wait to see if db2uext2 succeeds at a future attempt. If not, check at the file system level. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information.

39 Writing to file failed: The log file could not be copied to the archive directory. There could be a free space problem. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information.

40 Closing of log file failed.

41 Creating directory failed. Check the file system access authorizations. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information. It may be necessary to modify the environment variables DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH and DB2DB6_RETRIEVE_PATH.

43 Unable to read environment variable. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information.

44 Error when accessing file. Check the file system access authorizations. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information (for example, errno).

45 RC_AUDIT_IO_ERROR: Problem writing to db2uext2.err.NODExxxx or db2uext2.log.NODExxxx

46 File I/O seek error. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information (for example, errno).

48 SQL error occurred. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information. Check the SQL code in DB2 Message Reference.

49 SQL warning occurred. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information. Check the SQL code in DB2 Message Reference.

50 Registration of file space on ADSM/TSM server failed.

51 Binding of ADSM/TSM management class failed.

52 The API call “begin transaction” of the ADSM/TSM API failed.

53 The API call “end transaction” of the ADSM/TSM API failed.

54 Initialization of request to send object to ADSM/TSM server failed.

55 Sending of data stream to ADSM/TSM failed.

56 End of data sending to ADSM/TSM failed.

57 The API call “begin query” of the ADSM/TSM API failed.

58 The API call “end query” of the ADSM/TSM API failed.

59 Query of object on ADMS/TSM server failed.

60 Start of retrieve operation in ADSM/TSM storage failed.

62 Getting data stream from ADSM/TSM failed.

63 Obtaining requested object data from ADSM/TSM failed.

64 Signifying end of getting object cycle failed

Page 187: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 187

67 Object was not found on ADSM/TSM server.

68 Initialization of ADSM/TSM session failed.

69 Termination of ADSM/TSM session failed.

70 Deletion of object on ADSM/TSM server failed

80 DB2 CLI statemnet allocation failure. This is an internal error that you must report to SAP.

81 DB2 CLI Set statement option failure. This is an internal error that you must report to SAP.

82 DB2 CLI Prepare statement failure. This is an internal error that you must report to SAP.

83 DB2 CLI Bind parameter failure. This is an internal error that you must report to SAP.

84 DB2 CLI Execute statement failure. This is an internal error that you must report to SAP.

85 DB2 CLI Transcation statement failure. This is an internal error that you must report to SAP.

86 DB2 CLI Free statement. Failure.

Internal error. Report to SAP.

90 Windows only: Environment variable DSCDB6HOME not set. Check your environment.

91 Environment variable DB2DB6EKEY not set. Check your environment.

92 Password could not be retrieved from password file dscdb6.conf. On UNIX Check the file authorizations of /sapmnt/<SAPSID>/global (permission 700, owner <sapsid>adm, group db<dbsid>adm) and /sapmnt/<SAPSID>/global/dscdb6.conf (permission 600, owner <sapsid>adm, group sapsys). On Windows Check if share \\DSCDB6HOME\sapmnt is available and if the DB2 service has been started by user db2<dbsid>.

93 Environment variable DB2DBDFT not set. Check your environment.

101 Database management (DBM) parameter DFTDBPATH is not set or could not be retrieved. Try to retrieve this parameter on the command line. Check the database environment.

102 Database management (DBM) parameter DIAGPATH is not set or could not be retrieved. Try to retrieve this parameter on the command line. Check the database environment.

104 Log file ID cannot be obtained. Any log file to be archived by the DB2 User Exit is assigned a unique ID. It is generated in the Admin DB. If this error occurs, check the ADM<DBSID> database of your managed instance and contact SAP support.

110 Recording information failed: An action step cannot be protocolled in the Admin DB. Processing continues. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information.

Page 188: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

188 July 2006

111 Protocol database connect error. Check from the DB2 command line (CLP) whether a connection to ADM<DBSID> can be established. If not, contact SAP support. See also SAP Note 543779.

112 ADM<DBSID> object creation failed. No log file entry can be made in the Admin DB. Processing cannot continue. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information.

113 ADM<SID>: Write configuration parameter failed:

Internal error. Report to SAP.

114 ADM<SID>: Could not move log file to other location:

Internal error. Report to SAP.

115 Last backup timestamp could not be retrieved from the database recovery history file and could not be inserted in the Admin DB. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information.

116 The vendor user exit program could not be started. Check error file db2uext2.err.NODExxxx for more detailed information.

117 Vendor user exit program error. For detailed information, refer to the vendor user exit documentation.

For more detailed information about the most current documentation of the db2uext2 tool return codes, see SAP Note 104019.

Page 189: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 189

brarchive/brrestore Troubleshooting Checking the protocol output and corresponding corrective actions can solve most problems involving brarchive and brrestore.

However, when called directly on the command line the protocol is by default only written to file and no output appears on the command line. To override this, option -out must be included in the program call.

If an application does not perform correctly, make sure that you are using the most recent patch available on SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/patches. The version and patch level of each program can be seen near the top of each protocol.

As mentioned above, in addition to the standard environment tracing switches, brarchive and brrestore also allow activation of tracing on the command line using parameter -DEB <level>, for example, 1…9.

brarchive and brrestore Messages The following tables list brarchive and brrestore message IDs, their texts, and suggested corrective actions.

• brarchive and brrestore information messages have no numbers - only warnings and errors.

• LFA000 to LFA099 are brarchive and brrestore warning messages.

• LFA100 to LFA999 are brarchive and brrestore error messages.

• VND000 to VND999 are back end library error messages.

Page 190: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

190 July 2006

brarchive and brrestore Warning Messages

ID Message Comment

LFA000 Action ended with warnings.

Main action completed successfully but warnings were issued. See other messages for more information.

LFA001 <OLD> syntax supported but archaic. Use new syntax.

Although the program still supports this old command line option it may not in future releases. It is better to use the new syntax. Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA002 <OLD> syntax archaic and ignored. Use new syntax.

A command line option was ignored because it is no longer valid syntax. Use the new syntax. Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA005 <OLD> option supported but archaic. Use <NEW OPTION>.

Although the program still supports this old command line option it may not in future releases. It is better to use the new syntax. Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA006 -s with two devices and volumes supported but archaic. Use -ss.

Although the program still supports this old command line option it may not in future releases. It is better to use the new syntax. Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA007 -sd with two devices and volumes supported but archaic. Use -ssd.

Although the program still supports this old command line option it may not in future releases. It is better to use the new syntax. Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA009 Option <OPTION><ARG> supported but archaic – Interpreted literally

Although the program still supports this old command line option it may not in future releases. It is better to use the new syntax. Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA010 -d/-device not specified but tape implied.

Use -d tape to explicitly specify the device type.

LFA011 -d/-device not specified but ADSM implied.

Use -d adsm to explicitly specify the device type.

LFA015 Unexpected pattern argument

Use quotes for pattern, for example, '*.SAR'.

LFA015 No file pattern given

Warning if no file pattern is given. ‘*’ will be used.

Page 191: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 191

LFA021 No action specified on command line. Assuming '-help'.

Specify an action option. See the syntax diagram that is displayed.

LFA023 Using <DIRECTORY> for temporary files.

Ensure that environment variable DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR is set for user db2<dbsid>.

LFA024 Device not specified or implied. Using tape.

Use -d tape or -d adsm to explicitly specify the device type. The default value is tape.

LFA025 Device not specified or implied. Using adsm (default in the config table of the Admin database).

Use -d tape or -d adsm to explicitly specify the device type. The default value was changed to TSM in the Admin DB using the DB2 Control Center Extensions.

LFA031 File <FILE> could not be found for deletion.

A file intended for deletion was not found. No action is necessary as the file would have been deleted anyway. However, try to determine why the file was missing.

LFA032 Tape is initialized but volume unknown to system.

This is a valid log file archiving tape but appears to be owned by a different SAP system. Use -i force to force tape re-initialization for the current system.

LFA034

Unable to change real user. May result in errors.

Check installation and program authorizations. May cause other errors. Use option –checkonly of program sddb6ins to verify the installation. For more information about authorizations, see Installing the Admin Tools Manually [Page 47].

LFA036 Program finished before INSTHOME or db2<dbsid> home dir determined. Protocol file will remain in temp dir.

Look for the protocol file in the temporary directory set in environment variable DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR.

LFA037 Signal handling looping. Clean up may not be successful.

Internal problem caused by an error. Application may not be able to terminate properly.

Page 192: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

192 July 2006

LFA038 ... Operation completed with warnings.

Action was successful but warnings occurred. Check the protocol file for warning statements.

LFA039 Unable to connect to admin db. ls db started? (rc = <VALUE>)

Check if db2start has been executed. Otherwise, check the database error files. For the SQL return code, check the DB2 Message Reference.

LFA040 Query operation ended with warning.

Query may not be appropriate.

LFA041 Could not delete backup timestamp entries (rc = <VALUE>).

For the SQL return code, check the DB2 Message Reference.

LFA042 No backup timestamp entries found.

Warning: No backups appear to have been performed to this target.

LFA043 Unable to remove old protocol entries from admin db.

Non-critical error. Entries not found or internal error when accessing or deleting them.

LFA044 Are the program ownership and permissions set correctly?

Normally suggested in connection with another error or warning. Check the executable authorizations.

LFA046 XDB DB access function error (rc=<VALUE>).

SAP Basis Release 4.6D only: Log files may not be displayed in transaction DB13. If this causes concern, contact SAP support.

LFA047 Return without trying to connect to DB

Check DB environment or permission to connect to the Admin DB.

LFA048 config parameter too long

Value of the configuration parameter in table DB6CONFIG too long

LFA051 Unable to eject tape.

Tape must be ejected manually.

Page 193: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 193

LFA053 Directory <DIR> cannot be written to.

Only a problem if other messages reflect this.

LFA070 Tape has SID <SAPSID> and not <SAPSID> as expected!

Tape belongs to another system. If you are certain this tape is not needed, the tape header must be overwritten using operating system commands, for example, tar, cpio, or dd.

LFA071 Tape # has been reused # times (>#) and should be replaced.

This tape must be replaced as soon as possible. It is no longer reliable.

LFA073 Bad environment value ? <VARIABLE> = <VALUE

The environment variable value may be invalid. Check this variable in the user environment.

brarchive and brrestore Error Messages

ID Message Comment

LFA101 Parameter <OPTION> unknown.

Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA102 Action not allowed for <PROGRAM>.

Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA103 Action only allowed for <PROGRAM>.

Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA104 <OPTION> argument "<VALUE>" too long.

Use a shorter argument value. Be careful that you have not used wild card characters interpreted by the shell.

LFA105 <OPTION> argument missing.

Required argument is missing. Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA106 <OPTION> argument "<VALUE>" not OK.

Check and replace the bad string argument value. If the problem is not clear, refer to the option documentation.

LFA107 <OPTION> argument "<VALUE>" not OK.

Check and replace bad numeric argument value. If the problem is not clear, refer to the option documentation.

LFA108 Too many actions on the command line.

Only one action option is permitted. Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA109 <OPTION> results in repeated or conflicting parameters.

Check for repeating or conflicting options, for example, . –d ADSM or –d TAPE. Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA110 The option <OPTION> is required for this action.

The action requires that the additional option be used. Add the required option to the call.

Page 194: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

194 July 2006

LFA112 <VAL> “<VAL>”: Same device given twice.

Do not repeat arguments on the command line.

LFA113 The option <OPTION> requires two arguments for this action.

Provide the correct number of arguments.

LFA114 The option <OPTION><ARG> is 31I-specific. Please refer to new syntax.

Use the new syntax. The old syntax may no longer be supported in a later release. Use option –help to see the syntax.

LFA115 The option <OPTION><ARG> is not supported by <PROGRAM>

Use option -help to see the syntax.

LFA120 Problem determining value of <ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE>.

Check the db2<dbsid> user environment.

LFA121 Value of environment variable <ENV. VARIABLE> too long.

Check the db2<dbsid> user environment.

LFA130 Application error. Application error. Refer to other messages. If the cause is not clear, contact SAP support.

LFA131 Admin-tool database error (rc = VALUE).

Internal database call failed. Refer to other messages. Refer to the DB2 Message Reference for an explanation of the SQL code.

LFA132 Log-file delete failed.

Unable to delete the file. Refer to other messages.

LFA133 Error initializing tape.

Unable to initialize the tape. Refer to other error messages.

LFA134 Error while preparing list of files to process.

Error creating the file list for processing. Refer to other error messages.

LFA136 Backend function error (rc = <VALUE>).

Backend library function failed. Refer to other messages.

LFA137 Error while getting tape label.

Most likely an error occurred opening the session with the backend library. Refer to other messages.

LFA138 New tape label not set correctly.

Tape initialization failed. Retry the operation.

LFA141 <CONFIGURATION PARAMETER> parameter error. Check value in control center. (ADG rc = <VALUE>)

Check the default, tape device and tape device class values using the DB2 Control Center Extensions. For more information, see Configuration [Page 70].

Page 195: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 195

LFA142 Unable to open backend session.

Library initialization failed. Refer to other messages.

LFA143 Emergency restore failed.

Emergency restore operation failed. Refer to other error messages.

LFA144 Transfer operation failed.

Archive or restore operation failed. Refer to other error messages.

LFA145 Query operation failed.

Query operation failed. Refer to other error messages.

LFA146 Unable to create file list.

Error creating the file list for processing. Refer to other error messages.

LFA147 Unable to determine value for <ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE>.

Check the user environment (db2<dbsid>, <sapsid>adm) of the program caller.

LFA148 Delete on backend failed.

Delete operation for an archived log file failed. Refer to other error messages.

LFA149 Unable to load backend library.

Unable to find or load brarchive or brrestore library. Check the Admin Tools installation. Use option –check_only of the installation tool and check the installation documentation specifically for file authorizations.

For more information, see :

• SAP Web Application Server Installation on UNIX: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

• SAP Web Application Server Installation on Windows: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

LFA150 Unable to initialize session info.

Library initialization failed. Refer to other messages.

LFA151 Action failed. Operation failed. Refer to other error messages.

LFA152 <VALUE> is not a valid device.

Check the command line parameters and arguments.

Page 196: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

196 July 2006

LFA153 Cannot access sap<sapsid>/db2<dbsid> data file.

Unable to access an essential tool file. Check the Admin Tools installation. Use the –check_only option of the installation tool and check installation documentation specifically for file authorizations.

For more information, see:

• SAP Web Application Server Installation on UNIX: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

• SAP Web Application Server Installation on Windows: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows.

LFA154 Error preparing for operation.

Refer to other messages.

LFA155 No files were successfully processed to completion.

Error prohibited file processing. Retry operation.

LFA156 Not all files were successfully processed to completion.

Error prohibited some file processing. Retry operation.

LFA157 Unable to create file sub list.

Internal error. Refer to other messages.

LFA158 Error getting/releasing lock: <FILE>.

brarchive or brrestore may already be running. If not, delete the file and restart the program.

LFA159 No log_archive entry in Admin DB. Has User Exit been run?

Target directory unknown but should have been made available by the User Exit. Check the User Exit protocols. This error can also be caused by incorrectly performed upgrade.

LFA160 '-i set' not ok if tape already labeled. Use -i force.

The action -i set can only be used to initialize tapes that are out-of-date. Use -i force to force re-initialization of a current tape.

LFA161 Tape <DEVICE> must be initialized first. Use –I set or -i force.

The tape is not initialized. Use -i force to force initialization of a new, invalid or current tape.

LFA162 Tape <NUMBER> volume <LABEL> does not match command line value <LABEL>.

The label found on the referenced tape does not match the value specified with -v on the command line. Check that the correct tape being used.

LFA163 Default tape rewind and non-rewind addresses identical (<DEVICE>)

Check the default, tape device and tape device class values using the DB2 Control Center extensions. For more information about non-rewind address examples, see brrestore - Log File Retrieval Tool [Page 163].

Page 197: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 197

LFA164 Tape is not known to system. Initialize with -i force.

The tape is not known. Use -i force to force initialization of a new, invalid or current tape.

LFA165 Tape is initialized but volume is unreadable. Use -i force.

The tape label is not a valid format. Use -i force to force initialization.

The tape may be damaged or may have come from an incompatible system (Windows/UNIX).

LFA166 User is <USER> but should be <USER> or <USER>.

Only db2<dbsid> or <sapsid>adm users should start programs brarchive and brrestore.

LFA167 Program is already running. If not, delete <LOCK FILE>.

A lock file is already present. Either brarchive or brrestore is running elsewhere at the same time (wait for program to end) or a previous program call terminated unexpectedly (in this case delete <LOCK FILE>).

LFA168 Volume name <VOLUME> used on other tape. Use new name or re-initialize old tape.

Name already exists. Name can only be re-used if tape with this name is re-initialized.

LFA169 Tape not initialized or already used. Initialize with –i set/force.

Tape has not been initialized by brarchive.

LFA170 Tape not used and can therefore have no files.

Attempting to restore from the wrong tape?

LFA171 Tape device <DEVICE> not known. Must be registered in Control Center.

See “Tape Management” in Indirect Archiving to Tape [Page 82].

LFA180 Unable to allocate memory. Check system resources.

System memory error. Check system memory resources and retry operation.

Page 198: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

198 July 2006

LFA181 Unable to load library <LIBRARY NAME>.

Unable to find or load the brarchive or brrestore library. Check the Admin Tools installation. Use option –check_only of the installation tool and check the installation documentation specifically for files and file authorizations.

For more information, see:

• SAP Web Application Server Installation on UNIX: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows

• SAP Web Application Server Installation on Windows: IBM DB2 Universal Database for UNIX and Windows.

LFA182 Delete failed for file <FILENAME>. errno = <VALUE>.

Delete operation for the log file failed. Refer to other error messages. Check the file authorizations of <FILENAME>.

LFA184 Unable to determine home directory of <USER>.

If environment variable INSTHOME is not set, the application attempts to determine the home directory of user db2<dbsid>. Set variable INSTHOME.

LFA188 Unable to set signal handler.

System error that may result in incorrect program execution. Contact your system administrator.

LFA189 Unable to find file or directory <VALUE>.

Refer to other message and check the existence of the item. Has the file been automatically deleted by TSM or moved manually?

LFA190 Log file <FILE> has wrong format.

Check log file name is valid, for example, S0000000.19920211152635.NODE0000.

LFA191 Directory <dir> cannot be written to.

Check installation using the check option of program sddb6ins. If the problem is not resolved, contact SAP.

LFA200 Get backup timestamp entries failed (rc = <VALUE>)

No backup is known to the Admin DB. Make sure that you performed a database backup when you activated database recovery.

LFA201 Check backup timestamp is valid. Use: -q backups –out

Wrong timestamp format or length. See the output of the query for the correct format.

LFA202 Unable to extend file list

Cannot allocate memory to extend the file list.

LFA203 Add missing backups failed

Check the reason.

LFA240 Unexpected action. Internal error. Check the command line action option.

LFA241 Unexpected device. Internal error. Check the command line device option.

Page 199: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 199

LFA242 Unexpected log file status.

Internal error. Contact SAP support.

LFA243 Unexpected return code.

Internal error. Contact SAP support.

LFA244 Unexpected value. Internal error. Contact SAP support.

LFA245 Error creating Admin DB backup file.

Internal error. Contact SAP support.

LFA280 Error deleting <TYPE> DB entry (rc = <VALUE>)

Internal error. Contact SAP support.

LFA281 Error retrieving <TYPE> DB entry (rc = <VALUE>)

Internal error. Contact SAP support.

LFA282 Error updating <TYPE> DB entry (rc = <VALUE>)

Internal error. Contact SAP support.

LFA283 Error creating <TYPE> DB entry (rc = <VALUE>)

Internal error. Contact SAP support.

LFA284 New entry already in DB (rc = <VALUE>)

Internal error. Contact SAP support.

LFA285 Action <action> failed with <error_text>

Try to interpret the error text. If the meaning is not clear to you, contact SAP support.

LFA286 SQL Error: <SQL error text>

Try to interpret the error text. If the meaning is not clear to you, contact SAP support.

brarchive and brrestore Library Error Messages

ID Message Comment

VND000 Environment variable <ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE> is not set.

Check the db2<dbsid> user environment. See also accompanying system error message VND180.

VND001 Not enough disk space in <DIRECTORY>. Available: <VALUE> MB; needed: <VALUE> MB.

Delete files or increase the size of the file system.

Compressed file systems may calculate the amount of space available wrongly.

VND002 File size mismatch for <FILE>. <VALUE> on disk and <VALUE> kB on tape

The original file size does not match the size of the file restored. If the problem persists, the file may be damaged. You may be able to restore the file using the emergency restore option -ex.

Page 200: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

200 July 2006

VND003 Unable to access list of files to be processed.

See previous error messages.

VND004 Failed to save <FILE> (rc = <VALUE>)! Cannot continue…

Store operation failed. If the problem persists, the media may be damaged. Note return code for SAP support.

VND005 Failed to retrieve <FILE> (rc = <VALUE>)! Cannot continue…

Restore operation failed. If the problem persists, the media may be damaged. Note the return code for SAP support.

VND006 Failed to delete <FILE> (rc = <VALUE>)! Cannot continue…

Delete operation failed. If the problem persists, the media may be damaged.

VND008 Error writing data to file <FILE> (rc = <VALUE>).

Check the file and directory authorizations.

VND009 Error reading data from file <FILE> (rc = <VALUE>).

Check the file and directory authorizations.

VND010 Error closing file <VALUE> just sent to/retrieved.

System error. If the problem persists, contact SAP support.

VND011 Error opening file <FILE> to be sent to/retrieved.

Check the file and directory authorizations.

VND012 Query <Value> is not supported by back-end library.

Backend does not support the query. Check the backend version.

VND013 Command <Value> is not supported by back-end library.

Backend does not support the command. Check the backend version.

VND020 Volume size limit reached - no more log files will be processed.

According to the tape device class tape entry -size in the DB2 Control Center, the tape must now be full. Check that this entry matches the real tape size. Complete the (restart) operation with a new tape.

VND021 If the log file management tool was terminated, delete file <FILE>.

A temporary lock file is still present. Verify that brarchive is not already running for the same node or using the same device(s).

Page 201: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 201

VND022 Volume in device <DEVICE> has no label.

Tape needs initializing.

VND023 Check the volume or device.

Check the tape or tape drive. See other messages.

VND024 Label on volume in device <DEVICE> has the wrong format.

Tape needs initializing or may be damaged. In both cases, see other messages.

VND025 Wrong volume <LABEL> in device <DEVICE>, should be: <LABEL>

Put the correct tape in the drive or specify the correct label on the command line.

VND026 Volume in device <DEVICE> is write protected!

If the tape should be written to, remove the write protection.

VND027 Volume label could not be written to <DEVICE>.

Check the tape and device. See other messages.

VND028 Tape has to be initialized prior to usage.

Initialize the tape.

VND029 Character 'K','M','G' or 'T' should directly follow volume size.

The tape device class tape entry -size in the DB2 Control Center is incorrect.

VND030 Tape <Device name> is already in use. If not, delete the lock file or look for error (<file name or error message>).

A tape lock file is already present. Either brarchive or brrestore is running elsewhere at the same time (wait for program end) or a previous program call terminated unexpectedly (in this case delete the lock file).

VND031 SAP-SID on tape is <SAPSID>, should be <SAPSID>!

Tape is used by another SAP system. To overwrite data on tape, use the brarchive option -i force.

VND032 Wrong tape number <#> in device <Device name>, should be <#>

Check the command line parameters and the version of the backend.

VND042 Error registering ADSM file space '<FILE>' of Type '<String>’.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Check the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

Page 202: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

202 July 2006

VND043 ADSM mgmt class bind (<STRING>) failed! (FS-name: <STRING> - HL-name: <STRING> - LL-name: <FILE>)

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

VND044 Error starting ADSM transaction.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

VND045 Error sending object to ADSM.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

VND046 Error sending data to ADSM.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

VND047 Error ending process for sending object to ADSM.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

VND048 Error ending ADSM transaction.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

VND049 Error starting ADSM <STRING> query.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

VND050 Error ending ADSM <STRING> query.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

VND051 ADSM objects query found no match.

No entries match the queries. See other messages.

VND052 Error starting data transfer from ADSM 'STRING' repository.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

VND053 Error getting object from ADSM <STRING> repository.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

Page 203: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 203

VND054 Error during data transfer from ADSM.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

VND055 Error concluding object transfer from ADSM <STRING> repository.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

VND056 Error concluding data transfer from ADSM <STRING> repository.

Check the TSM installation and configuration. Look at the accompanying messages for return codes and TSM error messages. Contact Tivoli support if necessary.

VND059 ADSM reason <No>: <String>

TSM reason for an error

VND060 ADSM error <No>: <String>

TSM error number and description

VND061 Unable to load ADSM API DLL.

Check that TSM has been correctly installed.

VND062 Client's API version is higher than the ADSM version

brarchive executables and library do not match. Check the Admin Tools installation.

VND063 Client's ADSM API structures are incompatible/have changed

brarchive executables and library do not match. Check the Admin Tools installation.

VND064 File <FILE> not found in ADSM.

No matching files in TSM. Use TSM tools to verify if files exist.

VND101 … failed Operation failed. Refer to other error messages.

VND102 Internal library error.

Internal error. Refer to other error messages.

VND111 Tape <DEVICE> should be a non-rewind address.

Check the command line device name and DB2 Control Center configuration values. For more information about non-rewind address examples, see brrestore - Log File Retrieval Tool [Page 163].

VND149 Rewind of volume in device <DEVICE> failed.

Check the tape and device.

VND150 Copying <FILE> to/from <LOCATION> failed due to previous errors.

See other error messages.

Page 204: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

204 July 2006

VND170 File <FILE> already exists.

File already exists and will be overwritten.

VND181 Restore of <FILE> failed.

See other error messages.

VND182 Space information about device <DEVICE>. Available: <VALUE> MB; Needed: <VALUE> MB

Delete files or increase the size of the file system.

Compressed file systems may calculate the amount of space available wrongly.

VND186 <FILE> is not a directory.

Check if <FILE> is a directory; check if there is enough free space in the directory.

VND190 File <FILE> does not exist.

Check the file.

DB2 Control Center Extensions Troubleshooting The following tables provide information about error messages from the DB2 Control Center installation program on Windows:

Please change directory to <CDROM-drive>:\\NT\\I386\\ADMIN and start again!

Cause The installation program was not started in the specified directory.

Solution Switch to the specified directory and restart the installation.

DB2HOME not found

Cause DB2 client application enabler (CAE) is not installed or an error occurred during Registry access.

Solution Install DB2 client application enabler (CAE). Check that you can access the Registry and that there is a key software\IBM\DB2\DB2 Folder Name under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE.

Directory does not exist

Cause Directory <directory> does not exist.

Solution Check whether directory <directory> exists. If the directory is missing, one of the software components might not have been installed.

Page 205: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 205

Error executing car.exe

Cause Program car could not be executed.

Solution Contact SAP support.

Menu does not appear

Cause The DB2 administration tools were probably not installed correctly.

Solution Check whether directory...\sqllib\bin contains file sapdef.dll.

Logon dialog is not displayed

Cause The DB2 administration tools were probably not installed correctly.

Solution Check whether directory...\sqllib\bin contains files sapact.dll and sddb6wfm.dll.

Dialog is not displayed

Cause The DB2 administration tools were probably not installed correctly.

Solution Check whether directory...\sqllib\bin contains files sddb6wfm.dll, db6achpw.exe, db6atape.exe, db6algfl.exe, db6algfl.exe, db6aopt and db6ar3db.exe.

Since DB2 Control Center Extensions are an extension of the DB2 Control Center, a special start script switches on tracing for the DB2 Control Center. To run the DB2 Control Center with the DB2 Control Center Extensions trace switched on, start it with script db2ccdebug.bat. A trace file called db6cc.log is created in your TEMP directory.

Collecting Diagnostic Information for SAP Support While processing issues reported to SAP support, SAP support often needs data required for further investigation. Many of the data requested by SAP support for DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows can be grouped together to form typical data sets.

To ease data collection, a tool is provided that is described in SAP Note 83819. At present, the tool currently runs on UNIX systems only. To speed up processing of reported issues in DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows, the data collecting tool can be run when the issue is sent to SAP. The data collected needs to be provided to SAP. When you create a problem message, you should mention the file name and location.

Page 206: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

206 July 2006

Appendix C: Implementation Details

This appendix is only intended as a reference for SAP support personnel to assist with problem determination, or for customers directed by SAP support to perform specific operations.

Customers may wish to read this information for a better understanding of the tools and to inspect the system, but must not use this knowledge to change the system without an explicit request from SAP support.

Admin DB Structure

Wrong use of this information may make the log file management tools fail or make it impossible to recover log files required to fully restore a database backup

The Admin DB (or ADM<DBSID> database) is the core component of SAP DB2 administration. It contains administration management data, configuration parameters, and administration action protocols.

The most important tables in the Admin DB refer to log files and their locations. This information is used in recovering archived files. On occasion, support personnel will ask database administrators to extract information from this database to assist in problem determination. Other tables record information such as tape volume management and Admin Tools protocol data.

To understand the log file information in the Admin DB, it is essential that you understand the file states described in Log File States [Page 37].

The Admin DB should require very little administrative attention. The database administrator can decide whether to back up the database. However, this is not strictly necessary as brarchive in archive mode also stores the essential parts of the database from which it can be rebuilt.

Transaction logging is circular for the Admin DB, that is, LOGRETAIN and USEREXIT are set to OFF. This has the advantage that the Admin DB should continue to function even when the main SAP database is blocked by a file system containing log files that are becoming full.

The following graphic shows the Admin DB tables and their relationships.

Page 207: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 207

The following table describes the Admin DB tables shown in the graphic above, together with their keys. To see the complete structure of each table, use the DB2 DESCRIBE command.

Admin DB Tables

Table Name Key Description

DB6IDENTIFIER OBJID Unique identifier. Relates each object to a database node if appropriate.

DB6CONFIG OBJID

(from DB6IDENTIFIER)

Contains Admin Tools configuration parameters. These can normally only be set using the DB2 Control Center.

DB6LOCATION LOCID

(OBJID in DB6IDENTIFIER)

Contains the locations of log files and backups, plus tape information, for example, the TSM server name.

DB6BACKUP OBJID

(from DB6IDENTIFIER)

Contains imported backup information from the database recovery history file.

DB6LOGFILE OBJID

(from DB6IDENTIFIER)

Contains information about log files.

The OBJID key is not the log file number.

DB6LFSTATE OBJID

(from DB6IDENTIFIER) + LOCID (from DB6LOCATION)

Contains the location and state of each log file.

Page 208: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

208 July 2006

DB6TAPE OBJID

(from DB6IDENTIFIER)

Contains tape volume information.

DB6TAPETOC OBJID

(from DB6TAPE) + LFID (OBJID in DB6LOGFILE)

Contains the position of log files on each tape (accelerates recovery).

DB6DEVCLASS Name Contains tape device classes and related information, for example, 8mm, DLT

DB6DEVICE Name Contains physical tape devices and related information, for example, /dev/rmt0.

DB6ACTION

DB6ACTIONDETAIL

Contain the tool protocols used by DB2 Control Center Extensions. These tables can become very large.

DB6CACHE

DB6MESSAGE

Contain temporary data used for internal communication.

Additional Notes and Troubleshooting Information • Schema

The Admin DB tables are created with schema SAPR3 (even with MCOD systems), so all table references in SQL statements must be qualified with this value. For example, to list all location information, enter the following SQL statement: SELECT * from sapr3.db6location.

• Admin DB size

If the Admin DB is running out of space, this is usually due to the DB6ACTION and especially the DB6ACTIONDETAIL tables. Make sure that the Admin Tools are up-to-date. Only recent versions of brarchive prune these tables automatically.

Alternatively, if a tool is looping or being called repeatedly due to an error situation, these tables will fill very quickly. This can be determined by studying the contents of these tables.

• Log file information view DB6LOGFILE_PLACE

Log file numbers are stored in the integer column NAME in the DB6LOGFILE table. This number is the number contained in the log file name, for example, S0000456.LOG is log file number 456.

A convenient method of studying log file information is using the LOGFILE_PLACE view. This view joins several tables and displays the information in a slightly more user-friendly way. For example, enter the following SQL statement: SELECT * from sapr3.db6logfile_place

Page 209: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 209

The output can be limited by specifying a value or range for the NAME column (which contains the log file number). This view contains no node information.

In a multi-partitioned environment, if you require node-specific information, you must join this view with the DB6IDENTIFIER table, where the OBJID columns have the same value and NODE=’NODExxxx’ (replace xxxx with the node number).

• Recursive deletion

The relationships between tables DB6IDENTIFIER, DB6CONFIG, DB6LOCATION, DB6BACKUP, DB6LOGFILE, DB6LFSTATE, DB6TAPE, and DB6TAPETOC are set up with cascading deletes. In other words, if an object in DB6IDENTIFIER that relates to a log file is deleted, all related rows will also automatically be deleted from the tables DB6LOGFILE, DB6LFSTATE, and DB6TAPETOC.

Each tape has two object IDs – one related to the DB6LOCATION table and one related to the DB6TAPE table. There is no direct relationship joining these two objects.

• Backup data in table DB6BACKUP

The information in the DB6BACKUP table is extracted from the backup history file by the User Exit. This information is used to associate log files with a backup. If no backup is performed after the Admin Tools are installed, the User Exit will not be able to add this association. If the User Exit has not yet been run before brarchive is called for the first time, the backup information will be missing and brarchive also generates an error.

For best User Exit performance, it is also important that the backup history file is not too long. It may be necessary to prune the file occasionally.

• Configuration table DB6CONFIG

This table contains information to configure the Admin Tools. Normally it can only be updated using the DB2 Control Center Extensions. You can also use SQL to update the entries directly.

If an entry is corrupt or lost, this table can be reset to the default values. You can do this by using SQL to delete all related entries from the DB6IDENTIFIER table.

Be very careful only to delete the OBJIDs found in the configuration table DB6CONFIG and running sddb6ins -i.

• Mirroring in Admin Tools Release 4.6D

There is an extra executable in Admin Tools releases up to 4.6D called sddb6mir. This is used to mirror (duplicate) informative Admin DB information to the SAP database.

The mirror contains most of the tables that the Admin DB contains but these tables have one column less. They all have no mirror flag column. Although this should not be necessary, if you want to create the mirrored tables manually, do not attempt to create these tables using exactly the same structure as in the Admin DB.

Page 210: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

210 July 2006

brarchive and brrestore backend Library Architecture brarchive and brrestore were designed with an open interface to separate log file management logic from the lower-level code responsible for archiving and restoring data. The interface is described in the SAP system header file vnddb6lfm.h, which can be made available to vendors intending to provide a library interfacing to their archiving product. The separation of logic permits the log file management applications to retain full control over the Admin DB, whose interface is not open. At the same time it permits storage product manufacturers to provide backend libraries that implement low-level file storage to their products, for example, Tivoli Data Protection.

LfmVndInterface

tape library

TSM library

script library

vendor library

Tape customer

script

backend

backend

TSM

brarchive brrestore Admin DB

Page 211: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 211

DB2 Control Center Extensions Architecture The DB2 Control Center Extensions make use of an open DB2 interface to add functions to the DB2 Control Center via additional menu options. These functions are implemented using the following architecture:

The DB2 Control Center looks in directory sqllib/cc for a file called db2plug.zip. If this file exists, it will be loaded. It comprises the SAP extensions for the DB2 Control Center. In the context menu of any SAP DB2 instance or database, supplementary menu options will be offered. If any of these options is chosen, the corresponding SAP extension window appears. From this window, the user can perform several SAP DB2-specific administrative operations. Since all these operations are done on the server, stored procedure sddb6jds is called viJDBC. Sddb6jds calls the Admin Tools and manages the Admin DB ADM<DBSID>.

Page 212: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

212 July 2006

Appendix D: Example of File init<DBSID>.db6 File init<DBSID>.db6 on UNIX The following is an example of an environment file under UNIX: ######################################################################## # # # SAP DB2 Universal DB for Unix/Windows Environment File # # # # Enclose parameter values which consist of more than one symbol in # # double quotes. # # After any symbol, parameter definition can be continued on the next # # line. # # A parameter value list should be enclosed in parentheses, the list # # items should be delimited by commas. # # There can be any number of white spaces (blanks, tabs and new lines) # # between symbols for parameter definition. # # # ######################################################################## # db2<dbsid> home directory # # default: no default INSTHOME = /db2/Y6D # Log file archive directory # # default: /db2/<DBSID>/log_archive DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH = /db2/Y6D/log_archive # Log file retrieve directory # # default: /db2/<DBSID>/log_retrieve DB2DB6_RETRIEVE_PATH = /db2/Y6D/log_retrieve # Temporary work directory # # default: /tmp DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR = /tmp # Standby directory # # default: no default # DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR = # ignore errors on standby dir # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR_NOERR = ON # if ON, brarchive copies Admin DB backup SAR file to STANDBY_DIR # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR_ADMDBSAR = ON # Direct userexit archiving # # default: no default DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT = TSM:DEFAULT # Vendor userexit archiving # # default: no default # DB2DB6_VENDOR_UEXIT =

Page 213: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 213

# user exit archive without ADMDB # # default: OFF DB2DB6_UEXIT_ARCHIVE_WO_DB = ON # user exit retrieve without ADMDB # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_UEXIT_RETRIEVE_WO_DB = ON # deactivate signal handling for SIGSEGV and SIGBUS # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_CORE = ON # done eject tape (same as -one) # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_NO_EJECT = ON # Script name for -d script # # default: no default DB2DB6_LIBDB6SC_SCRIPT = # TSM multithread support is required, if TSM LANFREE option should be used # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_TSM_MULTITHREADED = ON # TSM shared library # # default: libApiTSM64.a(dsmapish_64.o) # DB2DB6_TSM_SLIB = libApiTSM64.a(dsmapish_64.o) # Admin DB reorg frequency in days # # default: 7 # DB2DB6_ADMDB_REORG_FREQUENCY = 7 # Disconnect from TSM after this time in seconds of no response. A value of zero turns off this timeout mechanism. # # default: 0 # DB2DB6_TSM_TIMEOUT = 0 # Userexit Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_DB2UEXT2 = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DB2UEXT2_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DB2UEXT2_PATH = /db2/Y6D/db2dump # Brarchive Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_BRARCHIVE = ON DB2DB6_TRC_BRARCHIVE_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_BRARCHIVE_PATH = /db2/Y6D/db2dump # Brrestore Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_BRRESTORE = ON DB2DB6_TRC_BRRESTORE_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_BRRESTORE_PATH = /db2/Y6D/db2dump # Stored Procedure Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6JDS = ON DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6JDS_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6JDS_PATH = /db2/Y6D/db2dump # TSM Util Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_DB6ADUTL = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DB6ADUTL_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DB6ADUTL_PATH = /db2/Y6D/db2dump

Page 214: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

214 July 2006

# Backup/Restore tool Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_BRDB6BRT = ON DB2DB6_TRC_BRDB6BRT_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_BRDB6BRT_PATH = /db2/Y6D/db2dump # DB6CLP Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_DB6CLP = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DB6CLP_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DB6CLP_PATH = /db2/Y6D/db2dump # Data Collector Trace DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6RDI = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6RDI_LEVEL = 9 DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6RDI_PATH = /tmp # Runstats Tool Trace DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6SRP = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6SRP_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6SRP_PATH = /tmp # Reorg Tablespace Tool Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6RTS = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6RTS_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6RTS_PATH = /db2/Y6D/db2dump # Backup DB Tool Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6BKP = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6BKP_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6BKP_PATH = /db2/Y6D/db2dump # History Utility # DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6HIS = ON DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6HIS_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6HIS_PATH = /db2/Y6D/db2dump # Mirror Utility # DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6MIR = ON DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6MIR_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6MIR_PATH = /db2/Y6D/db2dump # backup retries # # default: 10 # DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_RETRIES = 10 # backup block size for tapes # # default: 1024 # DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_BLOCK_SIZE = 1024 # backup util impact priority # # default: 0 # DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_UTIL_IMPACT_PRIORITY = 0 # enable backup compression # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_COMPRESS = OFF # online backup including logs # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_INCLUDE_LOGS = OFF # Update threshold in percent to flag tables for RUNSTATS # # default: 15 # DB2DB6_DMDB6SRP_UPDATE_THRESHOLD = 15

Page 215: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 215

# Minimum table size in rows to flag tables for RUNSTATS # # default: 1000 # DB2DB6_DMDB6SRP_TABLESIZE_THRESHOLD = 1000 # backup block size for tapes # # default: no default # DB2DB6_DB2DB6_BLOCK_SIZE = 1024 # Percentage of rows read for table size calculation for long and lob columns # # default: 10 # DB2DB6_DB6SRPRTS_PCT_LONG_LOB = 10 # Number of days to refresh CCMS archive log information # # default: 14 # DB2DB6_DMDB6RDI_REFRESH_LOG_INFO = 14 ######################################################################## # End of Environment File # ########################################################################File

Page 216: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

216 July 2006

init<DBSID>.db6 on Windows The following is an example of an environment file on Windows: ######################################################################## # # # SAP DB2 Universal DB for Unix/Windows Environment File # # # # Enclose parameter values which consist of more than one symbol in # # double quotes. # # After any symbol, parameter definition can be continued on the next # # line. # # A parameter value list should be enclosed in parentheses, the list # # items should be delimited by commas. # # There can be any number of white spaces (blanks, tabs and new lines) # # between symbols for parameter definition. # # # ######################################################################## # db2<dbsid> home directory # # default: no default INSTHOME = c:\db2n4d # Log file archive directory # # default: <drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\log_archive DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\log_archive # Log file retrieve directory # # default: <drive>:\db2\<DBSID>\log_retrieve DB2DB6_RETRIEVE_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\log_retrieve # Temporary work directory # # default: C:\WINNT\TEMP\1 DB2DB6_TEMP_DIR = C:\WINNT\TEMP # Standby directory # # default: no default # DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR = # ignore errors on standby dir # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR_NOERR = ON # if ON, brarchive copies Admin DB backup SAR file to STANDBY_DIR # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_STANDBY_DIR_ADMDBSAR = ON # Direct userexit archiving # # default: no default DB2DB6_UEXIT_DIRECT = TSM:DEFAULT # Vendor userexit archiving # # default: no default # DB2DB6_VENDOR_UEXIT = # user exit archive without ADMDB # # default: OFF DB2DB6_UEXIT_ARCHIVE_WO_DB = ON # user exit retrieve without ADMDB #

Page 217: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 217

# default: OFF # DB2DB6_UEXIT_RETRIEVE_WO_DB = ON # deactivate signal handling for SIGSEGV and SIGBUS # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_CORE = ON # done eject tape (same as -one) # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_NO_EJECT = ON # Script name for -d script # # default: no default # DB2DB6_LIBDB6SC_SCRIPT = # TSM multithread support is required, if TSM LANFREE option should be used # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_TSM_MULTITHREADED = ON # TSM shared library # # default: adsmv3.dll # DB2DB6_TSM_SLIB = adsmv3.dll # Admin DB reorg frequency in days # # default: 7 # DB2DB6_ADMDB_REORG_FREQUENCY = 7 # Userexit Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_DB2UEXT2 = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DB2UEXT2_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DB2UEXT2_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump # Brarchive Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_BRARCHIVE = ON DB2DB6_TRC_BRARCHIVE_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_BRARCHIVE_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump # Brrestore Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_BRRESTORE = ON DB2DB6_TRC_BRRESTORE_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_BRRESTORE_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump # Stored Procedure Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6JDS = ON DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6JDS_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6JDS_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump # TSM Util Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_DB6ADUTL = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DB6ADUTL_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DB6ADUTL_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump # Backup/Restore tool Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_BRDB6BRT = ON DB2DB6_TRC_BRDB6BRT_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_BRDB6BRT_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump # DB6CLP Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_DB6CLP = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DB6CLP_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DB6CLP_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump # Data Collector Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6RDI = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6RDI_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6RDI_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump

Page 218: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

218 July 2006

# Runstats Tool Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6SRP = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6SRP_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6SRP_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump # Reorg Tablespace Tool Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6RTS = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6RTS_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6RTS_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump # Backup DB Tool Trace # DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6BKP = ON DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6BKP_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_DMDB6BKP_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump # History Utility # DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6HIS = ON DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6HIS_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6HIS_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump # Mirror Utility # DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6MIR = ON DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6MIR_LEVEL = 3 DB2DB6_TRC_SDDB6MIR_PATH = c:\db2\N4D\db2dump # backup retries # # default: 10 # DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_RETRIES = 10 # tape pattern # # default: \\ # DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_TAPE_PATTERN = \\ # backup block size for tapes # # default: 1024 # DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_BLOCK_SIZE = 1024 # backup util impact priority # # default: 0 # DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_UTIL_IMPACT_PRIORITY = 0 # enable backup compression # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_COMPRESS = OFF # online backup including logs # # default: OFF # DB2DB6_DMDB6BKP_INCLUDE_LOGS = OFF # Update threshold in percent to flag tables for RUNSTATS # # default: 15 # DB2DB6_DMDB6SRP_UPDATE_THRESHOLD = 15 # Minimum table size in rows to flag tables for RUNSTATS # # default: 1000 # DB2DB6_DMDB6SRP_TABLESIZE_THRESHOLD = 1000 # backup block size for tapes # # default: no default # DB2DB6_DB2DB6_BLOCK_SIZE = 1024

Page 219: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 219

# Percentage of rows read for table size calculation for long and lob columns # # default: 10 # DB2DB6_DB6SRPRTS_PCT_LONG_LOB = 10 # Number of days to refresh CCMS archive log information # # default: 14 # DB2DB6_DMDB6RDI_REFRESH_LOG_INFO = 14 ######################################################################## # End of Environment File # ########################################################################

Page 220: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

220 July 2006

Page 221: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 221

Appendix E: Example of Customer Script db6sctsm.smp #!/bin/sh #********************************************************************* # * # SAP AG Walldorf / Germany * # Systeme, Anwendungen und Produkte in der Datenverarbeitung * # * # (C) Copyright SAP AG * # * # * # db6sctsm.smp * # * # * # Sample script to be used with brarchive/brrestore -d script. * # * # This sample script uses TSM (dsmc) to handle the log files. * # Instead of dsmc you can use your own commands. Also you can * # use os commands like cp, tar, ... . * # * # Attention: It is important to return LFMVND_RC_ERROR if the * # archive, retrieve or delete command failes! * # * # Arguments: * # action * # directory * # filename * # * # Returncodes * # LFMVND_STATUS_OK * # LFMVND_RC_ERROR * # LFMVND_COMMAND_NOT_SUPPORTED * # * #********************************************************************* #********************************************************************* # ReturnCodes # LFMVND_STATUS_OK=0 LFMVND_RC_ERROR=64 LFMVND_COMMAND_NOT_SUPPORTED=71 #********************************************************************* # Variables # res=$LFMVND_RC_ERROR outfile=/tmp/dsmc$$.out LANG=C export LANG #********************************************************************* # Arguments # action=$1 directory=$2 file=$3 #********************************************************************* # Messages # echo "action =$action" echo "directory=$directory" echo "file =$file" #********************************************************************* # Configuration section # mgmtclass=DEFAULT INIFILE=$INSTHOME/admintools/init$DB2DBDFT.db6 if [ ! -f $INIFILE ] then INIFILE=/usr/sap/$SAPSYSTEMNAME/SYS/global/init$DB2DBDFT.db6 fi

Page 222: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

222 July 2006

#********************************************************************* # Path to put the retrieved logfile # arch_path=`grep DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH $INIFILE | cut -f 2 -d =`/$DB2DBDFT/ case "$action" in #********************************************************************* # This section puts the logfile to the archive # "ARCHIVE") $DSM_DIR/dsmc archive -archmc=$mgmtclass -description='Log file' -compressa=yes $directory/$file | tee $outfile G=`grep 'Archive processing of.*finished without failure' $outfile` if [ "$G" = "" ] then res=$LFMVND_RC_ERROR fi ;; #********************************************************************* # This section retrieves the logfile from the archive # "RETRIEVE") $DSM_DIR/dsmc retrieve -replace=yes $arch_path/$file $directory/$file | tee $outfile G=`grep 'Retrieving.*\[Done\]' $outfile` if [ "$G" = "" ] then res=$LFMVND_RC_ERROR fi ;; #********************************************************************* # This section delete the logfile in the archive # "DELETE") $DSM_DIR/dsmc delete archive -noprompt $arch_path/$file | tee $outfile G=`grep 'Archive Delete.*\[Sent\]' $outfile` if [ "$G" = "" ] then res=$LFMVND_RC_ERROR fi ;; #********************************************************************* # *) echo "ERROR: action $action not supported" res=$LFMVND_COMMAND_NOT_SUPPORTED ;; esac echo "rc =$res" rm -f $outfile exit $res

Page 223: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 223

Appendix F: References

DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows V7 - Additional Documentation The following table divides the DB2 books into two categories:

• DB2 guide and reference information

These books contain the common DB2 information for all platforms.

• DB2 installation and configuration information

These books are for DB2 on a specific platform, for example, there are separate Quick Beginnings books for DB2 on platforms based on Windows and UNIX.

All manuals listed in the following table are available at www.software.ibm.com/db2.

Name Description

Administration Guide Administration Guide: Planning provides an overview of database concepts, information about design issues (such as logical and physical database design), and information about high availability.

Administration Guide: Implementation provides information about implementation issues such as implementing your design, accessing databases, auditing, backup and recovery.

Administration Guide: Performance provides information about database environment and application performance evaluation and tuning.

Administrative API Reference

Describes the DB2 application programming interfaces (APIs) and data structures that you can use to manage your databases. This book also explains how to call APIs from your applications.

Application Building Guide Provides environment setup information and step-by-step instructions about how to compile, link, and run DB2 applications on Windows, OS/2, and UNIX platforms.

Application Development Guide

Explains how to develop applications that access DB2 databases using embedded SQL or Java (JDBC and SQLJ). Discussion topics include writing stored procedures, writing user-defined functions, creating user-defined types, using triggers, and developing applications in partitioned environments or with federated systems.

CLI Guide and Reference Explains how to develop applications that access DB2 databases using the DB2 Call Level Interface, a callable SQL interface that is compatible with the Microsoft ODBC specification.

Page 224: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

224 July 2006

Command Reference Explains how to use the command line processor and describes the DB2 commands that you can use to manage your database.

Data Movement Utilities Guide and Reference

Explains how to use DB2 utilities, such as import, export, load, AutoLoader, and DPROP, that facilitate the movement of data.

Message Reference Lists messages and codes issued by DB2, the Information Catalog Manager, and the Data Warehouse Center, and describes the actions you should take.

SQL Getting Started Introduces SQL concepts and provides examples for many constructs and tasks.

SQL Reference, Volume 1 and Volume 2

Describes SQL syntax, semantics, and the rules of the language. This book also includes information about release-to-release incompatibilities, product limits, and catalog views.

System Monitor Guide and Reference

Describes how to collect different kinds of information about databases and the database manager. This book explains how to use the information to understand database activity, improve performance, and determine the cause of problems.

Troubleshooting Guide Helps you determine the source of errors, recover from problems, and use diagnostic tools in consultation with DB2 Customer Service.

What’s New Describes the new features, functions, and enhancements in DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 7.

DB2 Enterprise – Extended Edition for UNIX Quick Beginnings

Provides planning, installation, and configuration information for DB2 Enterprise - Extended Edition on UNIX platforms. This book also contains installation and setup information for many supported clients.

DB2 Enterprise – Extended Edition for Windows Quick Beginnings

Provides planning, installation, and configuration information for DB2 Enterprise - Extended Edition for Windows 32-bit operating systems. This book also contains installation and setup information for many supported clients.

DB2 for UNIX Quick Beginnings

Provides planning, installation, migration, and configuration information for DB2 Universal Database on UNIX platforms. This book also contains installation and setup information for many supported clients.

DB2 for Windows Quick Beginnings

Provides planning, installation, migration, and configuration information for DB2 Universal Database on Windows 32-bit operating systems. This book also contains installation and setup information for many supported clients.

Page 225: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 225

DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows V8 - Additional Documentation All manuals listed in the following table are available at software.ibm.com/db2.

Name Description

Administration Guide Administration Guide: Planning provides an overview of database concepts, information about design issues (such as logical and physical database design), and information about high availability.

Administration Guide: Implementation provides information about implementation issues such as implementing your design, accessing databases, auditing, backup and recovery.

Administration Guide: Performance provides information about database environment and application performance evaluation and tuning.

Administrative API Reference

Describes the DB2 application programming interfaces (APIs) and data structures that you can use to manage your databases. This book also explains how to call APIs from your applications.

Application Development Guide: Building and Running Applications

Provides environment setup information and step-by-step instructions about how to compile, link, and run DB2 applications on Windows, OS/2, and UNIX platforms.

Application Development Guide, Programming Client Applications and Programming Server Applications

Explains how to develop applications that access DB2 databases using embedded SQL or Java (JDBC and SQLJ). Discussion topics include writing stored procedure, writing user-defined functions, creating user-defined types, using triggers, and developing applications in partitioned environments or with federated systems.

CLI Guide and Reference Volume 1 and Volume 2

Explains how to develop applications that access DB2 databases using the DB2 Call Level Interface, a callable SQL interface that is compatible with the Microsoft ODBC specification.

Command Reference Explains how to use the command line processor and describes the DB2 commands that you can use to manage your database.

Data Movement Utilities Guide and Reference

Explains how to use DB2 utilities, such as import, export, load, AutoLoader, and DPROP, that facilitate the movement of data.

Message Reference Lists messages and codes issued by DB2, the Information Catalog Manager, and the Data Warehouse Center, and describes the actions you should take.

Page 226: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

226 July 2006

SQL Getting Started Introduces SQL concepts and provides examples for many constructs and tasks.

SQL Reference, Volume 1 and Volume 2

Describes SQL syntax, semantics, and the rules of the language. This book also includes information about release-to-release incompatibilities, product limits, and catalog views.

System Monitor Guide and Reference

Describes how to collect different kinds of information about databases and the database manager. This book explains how to use the information to understand database activity, improve performance, and determine the cause of problems.

What’s New Describes the new features, functions, and enhancements in DB2 UDB for UNIX and Windows Version 8.

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers

Provides planning, installation, migration, and configuration information for DB2 Universal Database servers.

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients

Provides planning, installation, migration, and configuration information for DB2 Universal Database client.

Page 227: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 227

Glossary and Index This glossary defines terms used in this documentation or terms often used by support personnel in connection with the Admin Tools. If appropriate, it also includes links to other parts of this documentation, which describe the term in more detail.

If you are unable to find an appropriate link for a topic in this documentation, refer to the table of contents or the DB2 documentation.

Term Description

<DBSID> and <dbsid> (SAP database name)

Refer to “<SAPSID> and <sapsid>” in this table.

<SAPSID> and <sapsid> (SAP system ID)

With the introduction of MCOD systems, it is necessary to differentiate between SAP system IDs and SAP database names. The changes are as follows:

• The former SAP system ID <SID> or <sid> changes to <SAPSID> or <sapsid>.

• The former SAP database name <SID> or <sid> changes to <DBSID> or <dbsid>.

The IDs and the SAP database names are case-sensitive. Make sure that you observe lower and upper case!

Additionally, user IDs (db2<dbsid>, <sapsid>adm, sapr3, sap<sapsid>) and directory names are affected. They are explained in more detail in Admin Tools: Enhancements and Changes [Page 13].

The new terms are valid for SAP systems with Release 4.6D and higher.

Admin Database

Admin DB

Refers to the database associated with the log file management tools.

The Admin DB has the name ADM<DBSID>. This is separate from the SAP system database <DBSID> but part of the same database manager instance db2<dbsid>.

Admin Tools

Refers to the SAP DB2 administration tools described in this documentation.

ADSM The IBM storage product ADSM has been renamed to TSM (Tivoli Storage Manager). For more information, see Naming Conventions [Page 12].

archiving

archival

Refers to the movement or copying of a file to other longer-term storage, with the assumption that the file is less likely to be lost there in case of system failure.

See the term User Exit for an example. Not to be confused

Page 228: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

228 July 2006

with backup. The opposite of retrieving.

archive directory Refers to the directory where brarchive stores log files, usually /db2/<DBSID>/log_archive. It is defined in the ini file as DB2DB6_ARCHIVE_PATH.

backend Refers to the target used to archive files to, such as tape, TSM or a vendor product

backup Refers to the action of storing the database in a form, which will allow it to be recovered (restored) later.

DB2 Control Center DB2 product offering a graphical interface used to administer databases. Offers extra functions when used with the SAP DB2 Control Center Extensions.

DB2 Control Center Extensions

Refer to SAP DB2 Control Center Extensions.

DB2 Database Manager Refers to the DB2 software controlling a database instance and its databases.

ESE Product name and refers to IBM DB2 UDB Enterprise Server Edition. For more information, see Naming Conventions [Page 12].

ini file init<DBSID>.db6

File init<DBSID>.db6 contains environment variables used by the Admin Tools for tasks such as turning on tracing. For more information, see Actions Performed by the sddb6ins Program [Page 53] and Appendix D: Example of File init<dbsid>db6 [Page 212].

log directory Refers to the directory where DB2 stores log files, usually /db2/<DBSID>/log_dir/NODExxxx. This is a DB parameter (db cfg) defined as “Path to log files”.

log file Refers to a file generated by DB2 to keep track of changes made to the database, for recovery purposes.

log file management tools The term log file management tools refers to components of the Admin Tools that perform log file management tasks:

• brarchive

• brrestore

• db2uext2 (User Exit)

• db6adutl

• libdb6ds (brarchive/brrestore library)

• libdb6tp (brarchive/brrestore library)

• libdb6sc (brarchive/brrestore library)

• sddb6mir (4.6D Admin Tools only)

mirror Has two meanings depending on the context:

• A copy of the Admin DB tables mirrored in the SAP database

• A copy of the entire SAP database, often on a

Page 229: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

July 2006 229

neighboring machine

Multiple Components in One Database (MCOD)

Multiple Components in One Database is referred to as MCOD.

This means that you can install an additional SAP system into an existing database. The Admin Tools have been modified to support this SAP system feature. For more information, see Admin Tools: Enhancements and Changes [Page 13].

For more information about released platforms and availability, see SAP Service Marketplace at www.service.sap.com/platforms and choose Multiple Components in One Database (MCOD).

password file Refers to file dscdb6.conf containing encrypted passwords. Contents are set using the dscdb6up utility. For more information, see Setting and Updating Passwords [Page 116].

protocol file

Refers to a file generated by an application, such as one of the Admin Tools, which indicates what the tool has done and contains any results or errors.

restore Refers to the action of restoring the database from a backup. This may be done after a system failure or in order to generate a database copy. This will often require a database roll-forward afterwards.

retrieving

retrieval

Refers to the movement or copying of a file back to disk from longer-term storage. This is normally only necessary after a system failure. See the term User Exit for an example. Not to be confused with restore, which is the opposite of archiving.

retrieve directory Refers to the directory where brrestore stores log files, usually /db2/<DBSID>/log_retrieve. It is defined in the ini file as DB2DB6_RETRIEVE_PATH.

roll-forward Refers to the extraction of database transaction data from log files. This information is added to a database after a restore operation in order to bring it up to date. Refer to the DB2 documentation in Appendix F: References [Page 223].

SAP DB2 Control Center Extensions

Product installed together with the Admin Tools, which extends the functionality of the DB2 Control Center to perform SAP-specific database administration tasks. For more information, see Installation and Setup of the DB2 Control Center Extensions [Page 60].

TSM The IBM storage product ADSM has been renamed to TSM (Tivoli Storage Manager). For more information, see Naming Conventions [Page 12].

User Exit Executable db2uext2. Used directly by DB2 to archive log files out of the log directory to either the archive directory, or directly to TSM. Also used by DB2 to retrieve log files in order to perform roll-forward operations after a database restore operation. For more information, see SAP Log File Management [Page 28].

Page 230: SAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide · PDF fileSAP NetWeaver ’04 Database Administration Guide SAP ... upgrade and database tools. ... 12 1.3 End of Support of SAP

230 July 2006